diff options
| author | Glenn Morris | 2007-05-22 06:16:37 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Glenn Morris | 2007-05-22 06:16:37 +0000 |
| commit | 782f8379b93b78ced9faadc2e17fb6f481660f82 (patch) | |
| tree | b175365dc5f2a25204ec25676592667859df1ed8 | |
| parent | 698c8370d994f75b78ca711a3144f18b0a26ca89 (diff) | |
| download | emacs-782f8379b93b78ced9faadc2e17fb6f481660f82.tar.gz emacs-782f8379b93b78ced9faadc2e17fb6f481660f82.zip | |
Move NEWS for Emacs 22 into a new file.
| -rw-r--r-- | etc/ChangeLog | 6 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | etc/NEWS.22 | 5408 |
2 files changed, 5414 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/etc/ChangeLog b/etc/ChangeLog index 6e365151b94..e793d0256d3 100644 --- a/etc/ChangeLog +++ b/etc/ChangeLog | |||
| @@ -1,3 +1,9 @@ | |||
| 1 | 2007-05-22 Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org> | ||
| 2 | |||
| 3 | * NEWS.22: New file with entries for Emacs 22. | ||
| 4 | * NEWS: Move Emacs 22 entries to new file NEWS.22, leave empty | ||
| 5 | template for next Emacs version. | ||
| 6 | |||
| 1 | 2007-05-19 Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org> | 7 | 2007-05-19 Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org> |
| 2 | 8 | ||
| 3 | * images/cancel.pbm: Convert from PGM to PBM. | 9 | * images/cancel.pbm: Convert from PGM to PBM. |
diff --git a/etc/NEWS.22 b/etc/NEWS.22 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..84c7b3b3bf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/etc/NEWS.22 | |||
| @@ -0,0 +1,5408 @@ | |||
| 1 | GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. | ||
| 2 | |||
| 3 | Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 | ||
| 4 | Free Software Foundation, Inc. | ||
| 5 | See the end of the file for license conditions. | ||
| 6 | |||
| 7 | Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. | ||
| 8 | If possible, use M-x report-emacs-bug. | ||
| 9 | |||
| 10 | This file is about changes in Emacs version 22. | ||
| 11 | |||
| 12 | See files NEWS.21, NEWS.20, NEWS.19, NEWS.18, and NEWS.1-17 for changes | ||
| 13 | in older Emacs versions. | ||
| 14 | |||
| 15 | You can narrow news to a specific version by calling `view-emacs-news' | ||
| 16 | with a prefix argument or by typing C-u C-h C-n. | ||
| 17 | |||
| 18 | * About external Lisp packages | ||
| 19 | |||
| 20 | When you upgrade to Emacs 22 from a previous version, some older | ||
| 21 | versions of external Lisp packages are known to behave badly. | ||
| 22 | So in general, it is recommended that you upgrade to the latest | ||
| 23 | versions of any external Lisp packages that you are using. | ||
| 24 | |||
| 25 | You should also be aware that many Lisp packages have been included | ||
| 26 | with Emacs 22 (see the extensive list below), and you should remove | ||
| 27 | any older versions of these packages to ensure that the Emacs 22 | ||
| 28 | version is used. You can use M-x list-load-path-shadows to find such | ||
| 29 | older packages. | ||
| 30 | |||
| 31 | Some specific packages that are known to cause problems are: | ||
| 32 | |||
| 33 | ** Semantic (used by CEDET, ECB, JDEE): upgrade to latest version. | ||
| 34 | |||
| 35 | ** cua.el, cua-mode.el: remove old versions. | ||
| 36 | |||
| 37 | |||
| 38 | * Installation Changes in Emacs 22.1 | ||
| 39 | |||
| 40 | ** You can build Emacs with Gtk+ widgets by specifying `--with-x-toolkit=gtk' | ||
| 41 | when you run configure. This requires Gtk+ 2.4 or newer. This port | ||
| 42 | provides a way to display multilingual text in menus (with some caveats). | ||
| 43 | |||
| 44 | ** The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual is now part of the distribution. | ||
| 45 | |||
| 46 | The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual in Info format is built as part of the | ||
| 47 | Emacs build procedure and installed together with the Emacs User | ||
| 48 | Manual. A menu item was added to the menu bar to make it easily | ||
| 49 | accessible (Help->More Manuals->Emacs Lisp Reference). | ||
| 50 | |||
| 51 | ** The Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp manual is now part of | ||
| 52 | the distribution. | ||
| 53 | |||
| 54 | This manual is now part of the standard distribution and is installed, | ||
| 55 | together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. A menu | ||
| 56 | item was added to the menu bar to make it easily accessible | ||
| 57 | (Help->More Manuals->Introduction to Emacs Lisp). | ||
| 58 | |||
| 59 | ** Leim is now part of the Emacs distribution. | ||
| 60 | You no longer need to download a separate tarball in order to build | ||
| 61 | Emacs with Leim. | ||
| 62 | |||
| 63 | ** Support for MacOS X was added. | ||
| 64 | See the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions. | ||
| 65 | |||
| 66 | ** Mac OS 9 port now uses the Carbon API by default. You can also | ||
| 67 | create a non-Carbon build by specifying `NonCarbon' as a target. See | ||
| 68 | the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions. | ||
| 69 | |||
| 70 | ** Support for a Cygwin build of Emacs was added. | ||
| 71 | |||
| 72 | ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on X86-64 machines was added. | ||
| 73 | |||
| 74 | ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on S390 machines was added. | ||
| 75 | |||
| 76 | ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on Tensilica Xtensa machines was added. | ||
| 77 | |||
| 78 | ** Support for FreeBSD/Alpha has been added. | ||
| 79 | |||
| 80 | ** New translations of the Emacs Tutorial are available in the | ||
| 81 | following languages: Brasilian Portuguese, Bulgarian, Chinese (both | ||
| 82 | with simplified and traditional characters), French, Russian, and | ||
| 83 | Italian. Type `C-u C-h t' to choose one of them in case your language | ||
| 84 | setup doesn't automatically select the right one. | ||
| 85 | |||
| 86 | ** New translations of the Emacs reference card are available in the | ||
| 87 | Brasilian Portuguese and Russian. The corresponding PostScript files | ||
| 88 | are also included. | ||
| 89 | |||
| 90 | ** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available. | ||
| 91 | |||
| 92 | ** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix', | ||
| 93 | `--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of | ||
| 94 | installed programs. | ||
| 95 | |||
| 96 | ** By default, Emacs now uses a setgid helper program to update game | ||
| 97 | scores. The directory ${localstatedir}/games/emacs is the normal | ||
| 98 | place for game scores to be stored. You can control this with the | ||
| 99 | configure option `--with-game-dir'. The specific user that Emacs uses | ||
| 100 | to own the game scores is controlled by `--with-game-user'. If access | ||
| 101 | to a game user is not available, then scores will be stored separately | ||
| 102 | in each user's home directory. | ||
| 103 | |||
| 104 | ** Emacs now includes support for loading image libraries on demand. | ||
| 105 | (Currently this feature is only used on MS Windows.) You can configure | ||
| 106 | the supported image types and their associated dynamic libraries by | ||
| 107 | setting the variable `image-library-alist'. | ||
| 108 | |||
| 109 | ** Emacs can now be built without sound support. | ||
| 110 | |||
| 111 | ** Emacs Lisp source files are compressed by default if `gzip' is available. | ||
| 112 | |||
| 113 | ** All images used in Emacs have been consolidated in etc/images and subdirs. | ||
| 114 | See also the changes to `find-image', documented below. | ||
| 115 | |||
| 116 | ** Emacs comes with a new set of icons. | ||
| 117 | These icons are displayed on the taskbar and/or titlebar when Emacs | ||
| 118 | runs in a graphical environment. Source files for these icons can be | ||
| 119 | found in etc/images/icons. (You can't change the icons displayed by | ||
| 120 | Emacs by changing these files directly. On X, the icon is compiled | ||
| 121 | into the Emacs executable; see gnu.h in the source tree. On MS | ||
| 122 | Windows, see nt/icons/emacs.ico.) | ||
| 123 | |||
| 124 | ** The `emacsserver' program has been removed, replaced with Lisp code. | ||
| 125 | |||
| 126 | ** The `yow' program has been removed. | ||
| 127 | Use the corresponding Emacs feature instead. | ||
| 128 | |||
| 129 | ** The Emacs terminal emulation in term.el uses a different terminfo name. | ||
| 130 | The Emacs terminal emulation in term.el now uses "eterm-color" as its | ||
| 131 | terminfo name, since term.el now supports color. | ||
| 132 | |||
| 133 | ** The script etc/emacs-buffer.gdb can be used with gdb to retrieve the | ||
| 134 | contents of buffers from a core dump and save them to files easily, should | ||
| 135 | Emacs crash. | ||
| 136 | |||
| 137 | ** Building with -DENABLE_CHECKING does not automatically build with union | ||
| 138 | types any more. Add -DUSE_LISP_UNION_TYPE if you want union types. | ||
| 139 | |||
| 140 | ** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how | ||
| 141 | much pure storage it will approximately need. | ||
| 142 | |||
| 143 | |||
| 144 | * Startup Changes in Emacs 22.1 | ||
| 145 | |||
| 146 | ** Init file changes | ||
| 147 | If the init file ~/.emacs does not exist, Emacs will try | ||
| 148 | ~/.emacs.d/init.el or ~/.emacs.d/init.elc. Likewise, if the shell init file | ||
| 149 | ~/.emacs_SHELL is not found, Emacs will try ~/.emacs.d/init_SHELL.sh. | ||
| 150 | |||
| 151 | ** Emacs can now be invoked in full-screen mode on a windowed display. | ||
| 152 | When Emacs is invoked on a window system, the new command-line options | ||
| 153 | `--fullwidth', `--fullheight', and `--fullscreen' produce a frame | ||
| 154 | whose width, height, or both width and height take up the entire | ||
| 155 | screen size. (For now, this does not work with some window managers.) | ||
| 156 | |||
| 157 | ** Emacs now displays a splash screen by default even if command-line | ||
| 158 | arguments were given. The new command-line option --no-splash | ||
| 159 | disables the splash screen; see also the variable | ||
| 160 | `inhibit-splash-screen' (which is also aliased as | ||
| 161 | `inhibit-startup-message'). | ||
| 162 | |||
| 163 | ** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'. | ||
| 164 | When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally | ||
| 165 | displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off. | ||
| 166 | |||
| 167 | ** New command line option -nbc or --no-blinking-cursor disables | ||
| 168 | the blinking cursor on graphical terminals. | ||
| 169 | |||
| 170 | ** The option --script FILE runs Emacs in batch mode and loads FILE. | ||
| 171 | It is useful for writing Emacs Lisp shell script files, because they | ||
| 172 | can start with this line: | ||
| 173 | |||
| 174 | #!/usr/bin/emacs --script | ||
| 175 | |||
| 176 | ** The -f option, used from the command line to call a function, | ||
| 177 | now reads arguments for the function interactively if it is | ||
| 178 | an interactively callable function. | ||
| 179 | |||
| 180 | ** The option --directory DIR now modifies `load-path' immediately. | ||
| 181 | Directories are added to the front of `load-path' in the order they | ||
| 182 | appear on the command line. For example, with this command line: | ||
| 183 | |||
| 184 | emacs -batch -L .. -L /tmp --eval "(require 'foo)" | ||
| 185 | |||
| 186 | Emacs looks for library `foo' in the parent directory, then in /tmp, then | ||
| 187 | in the other directories in `load-path'. (-L is short for --directory.) | ||
| 188 | |||
| 189 | ** When you specify a frame size with --geometry, the size applies to | ||
| 190 | all frames you create. A position specified with --geometry only | ||
| 191 | affects the initial frame. | ||
| 192 | |||
| 193 | ** Emacs built for MS-Windows now behaves like Emacs on X does, | ||
| 194 | with respect to its frame position: if you don't specify a position | ||
| 195 | (in your .emacs init file, in the Registry, or with the --geometry | ||
| 196 | command-line option), Emacs leaves the frame position to the Windows' | ||
| 197 | window manager. | ||
| 198 | |||
| 199 | ** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to | ||
| 200 | --no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated. | ||
| 201 | |||
| 202 | ** If the environment variable DISPLAY specifies an unreachable X display, | ||
| 203 | Emacs will now startup as if invoked with the --no-window-system option. | ||
| 204 | |||
| 205 | ** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs | ||
| 206 | automatically at startup, if it exists. When Emacs offers to save | ||
| 207 | modified buffers, it saves the abbrevs too if they have changed. It | ||
| 208 | can do this either silently or asking for confirmation first, | ||
| 209 | according to the value of `save-abbrevs'. | ||
| 210 | |||
| 211 | ** New command line option -Q or --quick. | ||
| 212 | This is like using -q --no-site-file, but in addition it also disables | ||
| 213 | the fancy startup screen. | ||
| 214 | |||
| 215 | ** New command line option -D or --basic-display. | ||
| 216 | Disables the menu-bar, the tool-bar, the scroll-bars, tool tips, and | ||
| 217 | the blinking cursor. | ||
| 218 | |||
| 219 | ** The default is now to use a bitmap as the icon. | ||
| 220 | The command-line options --icon-type, -i have been replaced with | ||
| 221 | options --no-bitmap-icon, -nbi to turn the bitmap icon off. | ||
| 222 | |||
| 223 | ** If the environment variable EMAIL is defined, Emacs now uses its value | ||
| 224 | to compute the default value of `user-mail-address', in preference to | ||
| 225 | concatenation of `user-login-name' with the name of your host machine. | ||
| 226 | |||
| 227 | |||
| 228 | * Incompatible Editing Changes in Emacs 22.1 | ||
| 229 | |||
| 230 | ** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link. | ||
| 231 | |||
| 232 | See below for more details. | ||
| 233 | |||
| 234 | ** When the undo information of the current command gets really large | ||
| 235 | (beyond the value of `undo-outer-limit'), Emacs discards it and warns | ||
| 236 | you about it. | ||
| 237 | |||
| 238 | ** When Emacs prompts for file names, SPC no longer completes the file name. | ||
| 239 | This is so filenames with embedded spaces could be input without the | ||
| 240 | need to quote the space with a C-q. The underlying changes in the | ||
| 241 | keymaps that are active in the minibuffer are described below under | ||
| 242 | "New keymaps for typing file names". | ||
| 243 | |||
| 244 | ** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only | ||
| 245 | to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point, | ||
| 246 | it remains unchanged. | ||
| 247 | |||
| 248 | ** In incremental search, C-w is changed. M-%, C-M-w and C-M-y are special. | ||
| 249 | |||
| 250 | See below under "incremental search changes". | ||
| 251 | |||
| 252 | ** M-g is now a prefix key. | ||
| 253 | M-g g and M-g M-g run goto-line. | ||
| 254 | M-g n and M-g M-n run next-error (like C-x `). | ||
| 255 | M-g p and M-g M-p run previous-error. | ||
| 256 | |||
| 257 | ** C-u M-g M-g switches to the most recent previous buffer, | ||
| 258 | and goes to the specified line in that buffer. | ||
| 259 | |||
| 260 | When goto-line starts to execute, if there's a number in the buffer at | ||
| 261 | point then it acts as the default argument for the minibuffer. | ||
| 262 | |||
| 263 | ** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties; | ||
| 264 | M-o M-o requests refontification. | ||
| 265 | |||
| 266 | ** C-x C-f RET (find-file), typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer | ||
| 267 | a special case. | ||
| 268 | |||
| 269 | Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect | ||
| 270 | of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the | ||
| 271 | directory with Dired. | ||
| 272 | |||
| 273 | You can get the old behavior by typing C-x C-f M-n RET, which fetches | ||
| 274 | the actual file name into the minibuffer. | ||
| 275 | |||
| 276 | ** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now | ||
| 277 | control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded | ||
| 278 | by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards | ||
| 279 | too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the | ||
| 280 | doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent | ||
| 281 | special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'. | ||
| 282 | |||
| 283 | ** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a | ||
| 284 | previous mark if you set `set-mark-command-repeat-pop' to t. I.e. C-u | ||
| 285 | C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC | ||
| 286 | to set the mark immediately after a jump. | ||
| 287 | |||
| 288 | ** The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i | ||
| 289 | have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S. | ||
| 290 | |||
| 291 | ** `apply-macro-to-region-lines' now operates on all lines that begin | ||
| 292 | in the region, rather than on all complete lines in the region. | ||
| 293 | |||
| 294 | ** line-move-ignore-invisible now defaults to t. | ||
| 295 | |||
| 296 | ** Adaptive filling misfeature removed. | ||
| 297 | It no longer treats `NNN.' or `(NNN)' as a prefix. | ||
| 298 | |||
| 299 | ** The old bindings C-M-delete and C-M-backspace have been deleted, | ||
| 300 | since there are situations where one or the other will shut down | ||
| 301 | the operating system or your X server. | ||
| 302 | |||
| 303 | ** The register compatibility key bindings (deprecated since Emacs 19) | ||
| 304 | have been removed: | ||
| 305 | C-x / point-to-register (Use: C-x r SPC) | ||
| 306 | C-x j jump-to-register (Use: C-x r j) | ||
| 307 | C-x x copy-to-register (Use: C-x r s) | ||
| 308 | C-x g insert-register (Use: C-x r i) | ||
| 309 | |||
| 310 | |||
| 311 | * Editing Changes in Emacs 22.1 | ||
| 312 | |||
| 313 | ** The max size of buffers and integers has been doubled. | ||
| 314 | On 32bit machines, it is now 256M (i.e. 268435455). | ||
| 315 | |||
| 316 | ** !MEM FULL! at the start of the mode line indicates that Emacs | ||
| 317 | cannot get any more memory for Lisp data. This often means it could | ||
| 318 | crash soon if you do things that use more memory. On most systems, | ||
| 319 | killing buffers will get out of this state. If killing buffers does | ||
| 320 | not make !MEM FULL! disappear, you should save your work and start | ||
| 321 | a new Emacs. | ||
| 322 | |||
| 323 | ** `undo-only' does an undo which does not redo any previous undo. | ||
| 324 | |||
| 325 | ** Yanking text now discards certain text properties that can | ||
| 326 | be inconvenient when you did not expect them. The variable | ||
| 327 | `yank-excluded-properties' specifies which ones. Insertion | ||
| 328 | of register contents and rectangles also discards these properties. | ||
| 329 | |||
| 330 | ** New command `kill-whole-line' kills an entire line at once. | ||
| 331 | By default, it is bound to C-S-<backspace>. | ||
| 332 | |||
| 333 | ** M-SPC (just-one-space) when given a numeric argument N | ||
| 334 | converts whitespace around point to N spaces. | ||
| 335 | |||
| 336 | ** You can now switch buffers in a cyclic order with C-x C-left | ||
| 337 | (previous-buffer) and C-x C-right (next-buffer). C-x left and | ||
| 338 | C-x right can be used as well. The functions keep a different buffer | ||
| 339 | cycle for each frame, using the frame-local buffer list. | ||
| 340 | |||
| 341 | ** C-x 5 C-o displays a specified buffer in another frame | ||
| 342 | but does not switch to that frame. It's the multi-frame | ||
| 343 | analogue of C-x 4 C-o. | ||
| 344 | |||
| 345 | ** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now | ||
| 346 | understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and | ||
| 347 | `same-window'. | ||
| 348 | |||
| 349 | ** New commands to operate on pairs of open and close characters: | ||
| 350 | `insert-pair', `delete-pair', `raise-sexp'. | ||
| 351 | |||
| 352 | ** M-x setenv now expands environment variable references. | ||
| 353 | |||
| 354 | Substrings of the form `$foo' and `${foo}' in the specified new value | ||
| 355 | now refer to the value of environment variable foo. To include a `$' | ||
| 356 | in the value, use `$$'. | ||
| 357 | |||
| 358 | ** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have | ||
| 359 | been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used | ||
| 360 | in Paragraph-Indent Text mode. | ||
| 361 | |||
| 362 | ** The default for the paper size (variable ps-paper-type) is taken | ||
| 363 | from the locale. | ||
| 364 | |||
| 365 | ** Help command changes: | ||
| 366 | |||
| 367 | *** Changes in C-h bindings: | ||
| 368 | |||
| 369 | C-h e displays the *Messages* buffer. | ||
| 370 | |||
| 371 | C-h d runs apropos-documentation. | ||
| 372 | |||
| 373 | C-h r visits the Emacs Manual in Info. | ||
| 374 | |||
| 375 | C-h followed by a control character is used for displaying files | ||
| 376 | that do not change: | ||
| 377 | |||
| 378 | C-h C-f displays the FAQ. | ||
| 379 | C-h C-e displays the PROBLEMS file. | ||
| 380 | |||
| 381 | The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i | ||
| 382 | have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S. | ||
| 383 | |||
| 384 | C-h c, C-h k, C-h w, and C-h f now handle remapped interactive commands. | ||
| 385 | - C-h c and C-h k report the actual command (after possible remapping) | ||
| 386 | run by the key sequence. | ||
| 387 | - C-h w and C-h f on a command which has been remapped now report the | ||
| 388 | command it is remapped to, and the keys which can be used to run | ||
| 389 | that command. | ||
| 390 | |||
| 391 | For example, if C-k is bound to kill-line, and kill-line is remapped | ||
| 392 | to new-kill-line, these commands now report: | ||
| 393 | - C-h c and C-h k C-k reports: | ||
| 394 | C-k runs the command new-kill-line | ||
| 395 | - C-h w and C-h f kill-line reports: | ||
| 396 | kill-line is remapped to new-kill-line which is on C-k, <deleteline> | ||
| 397 | - C-h w and C-h f new-kill-line reports: | ||
| 398 | new-kill-line is on C-k | ||
| 399 | |||
| 400 | *** The apropos commands now accept a list of words to match. | ||
| 401 | When more than one word is specified, at least two of those words must | ||
| 402 | be present for an item to match. Regular expression matching is still | ||
| 403 | available. | ||
| 404 | |||
| 405 | *** The new option `apropos-sort-by-scores' causes the matching items | ||
| 406 | to be sorted according to their score. The score for an item is a | ||
| 407 | number calculated to indicate how well the item matches the words or | ||
| 408 | regular expression that you entered to the apropos command. The best | ||
| 409 | match is listed first, and the calculated score is shown for each | ||
| 410 | matching item. | ||
| 411 | |||
| 412 | *** Help commands `describe-function' and `describe-key' now show function | ||
| 413 | arguments in lowercase italics on displays that support it. To change the | ||
| 414 | default, customize face `help-argument-name' or redefine the function | ||
| 415 | `help-default-arg-highlight'. | ||
| 416 | |||
| 417 | *** C-h v and C-h f commands now include a hyperlink to the C source for | ||
| 418 | variables and functions defined in C (if the C source is available). | ||
| 419 | |||
| 420 | *** Help mode now only makes hyperlinks for faces when the face name is | ||
| 421 | preceded or followed by the word `face'. It no longer makes | ||
| 422 | hyperlinks for variables without variable documentation, unless | ||
| 423 | preceded by one of the words `variable' or `option'. It now makes | ||
| 424 | hyperlinks to Info anchors (or nodes) if the anchor (or node) name is | ||
| 425 | enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `info anchor' or `Info | ||
| 426 | anchor' (in addition to earlier `info node' and `Info node'). In | ||
| 427 | addition, it now makes hyperlinks to URLs as well if the URL is | ||
| 428 | enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `URL'. | ||
| 429 | |||
| 430 | *** The new command `describe-char' (C-u C-x =) pops up a buffer with | ||
| 431 | description various information about a character, including its | ||
| 432 | encodings and syntax, its text properties, how to input, overlays, and | ||
| 433 | widgets at point. You can get more information about some of them, by | ||
| 434 | clicking on mouse-sensitive areas or moving there and pressing RET. | ||
| 435 | |||
| 436 | *** The command `list-text-properties-at' has been deleted because | ||
| 437 | C-u C-x = gives the same information and more. | ||
| 438 | |||
| 439 | *** New command `display-local-help' displays any local help at point | ||
| 440 | in the echo area. It is bound to `C-h .'. It normally displays the | ||
| 441 | same string that would be displayed on mouse-over using the | ||
| 442 | `help-echo' property, but, in certain cases, it can display a more | ||
| 443 | keyboard oriented alternative. | ||
| 444 | |||
| 445 | *** New user option `help-at-pt-display-when-idle' allows to | ||
| 446 | automatically show the help provided by `display-local-help' on | ||
| 447 | point-over, after suitable idle time. The amount of idle time is | ||
| 448 | determined by the user option `help-at-pt-timer-delay' and defaults | ||
| 449 | to one second. This feature is turned off by default. | ||
| 450 | |||
| 451 | ** Mark command changes: | ||
| 452 | |||
| 453 | *** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a | ||
| 454 | previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the | ||
| 455 | mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump. | ||
| 456 | |||
| 457 | *** Marking commands extend the region when invoked multiple times. | ||
| 458 | |||
| 459 | If you type C-M-SPC (mark-sexp), M-@ (mark-word), M-h | ||
| 460 | (mark-paragraph), or C-M-h (mark-defun) repeatedly, the marked region | ||
| 461 | extends each time, so you can mark the next two sexps with M-C-SPC | ||
| 462 | M-C-SPC, for example. This feature also works for | ||
| 463 | mark-end-of-sentence, if you bind that to a key. It also extends the | ||
| 464 | region when the mark is active in Transient Mark mode, regardless of | ||
| 465 | the last command. To start a new region with one of marking commands | ||
| 466 | in Transient Mark mode, you can deactivate the active region with C-g, | ||
| 467 | or set the new mark with C-SPC. | ||
| 468 | |||
| 469 | *** Some commands do something special in Transient Mark mode when the | ||
| 470 | mark is active--for instance, they limit their operation to the | ||
| 471 | region. Even if you don't normally use Transient Mark mode, you might | ||
| 472 | want to get this behavior from a particular command. There are two | ||
| 473 | ways you can enable Transient Mark mode and activate the mark, for one | ||
| 474 | command only. | ||
| 475 | |||
| 476 | One method is to type C-SPC C-SPC; this enables Transient Mark mode | ||
| 477 | and sets the mark at point. The other method is to type C-u C-x C-x. | ||
| 478 | This enables Transient Mark mode temporarily but does not alter the | ||
| 479 | mark or the region. | ||
| 480 | |||
| 481 | After these commands, Transient Mark mode remains enabled until you | ||
| 482 | deactivate the mark. That typically happens when you type a command | ||
| 483 | that alters the buffer, but you can also deactivate the mark by typing | ||
| 484 | C-g. | ||
| 485 | |||
| 486 | *** Movement commands `beginning-of-buffer', `end-of-buffer', | ||
| 487 | `beginning-of-defun', `end-of-defun' do not set the mark if the mark | ||
| 488 | is already active in Transient Mark mode. | ||
| 489 | |||
| 490 | *** M-h (mark-paragraph) now accepts a prefix arg. | ||
| 491 | |||
| 492 | With positive arg, M-h marks the current and the following paragraphs; | ||
| 493 | if the arg is negative, it marks the current and the preceding | ||
| 494 | paragraphs. | ||
| 495 | |||
| 496 | ** Incremental Search changes: | ||
| 497 | |||
| 498 | *** M-% typed in isearch mode invokes `query-replace' or | ||
| 499 | `query-replace-regexp' (depending on search mode) with the current | ||
| 500 | search string used as the string to replace. | ||
| 501 | |||
| 502 | *** C-w in incremental search now grabs either a character or a word, | ||
| 503 | making the decision in a heuristic way. This new job is done by the | ||
| 504 | command `isearch-yank-word-or-char'. To restore the old behavior, | ||
| 505 | bind C-w to `isearch-yank-word' in `isearch-mode-map'. | ||
| 506 | |||
| 507 | *** C-y in incremental search now grabs the next line if point is already | ||
| 508 | at the end of a line. | ||
| 509 | |||
| 510 | *** C-M-w deletes and C-M-y grabs a character in isearch mode. | ||
| 511 | Another method to grab a character is to enter the minibuffer by `M-e' | ||
| 512 | and to type `C-f' at the end of the search string in the minibuffer. | ||
| 513 | |||
| 514 | *** Vertical scrolling is now possible within incremental search. | ||
| 515 | To enable this feature, customize the new user option | ||
| 516 | `isearch-allow-scroll'. User written commands which satisfy stringent | ||
| 517 | constraints can be marked as "scrolling commands". See the Emacs manual | ||
| 518 | for details. | ||
| 519 | |||
| 520 | *** Isearch no longer adds `isearch-resume' commands to the command | ||
| 521 | history by default. To enable this feature, customize the new | ||
| 522 | user option `isearch-resume-in-command-history'. | ||
| 523 | |||
| 524 | ** Replace command changes: | ||
| 525 | |||
| 526 | *** When used interactively, the commands `query-replace-regexp' and | ||
| 527 | `replace-regexp' allow \,expr to be used in a replacement string, | ||
| 528 | where expr is an arbitrary Lisp expression evaluated at replacement | ||
| 529 | time. `\#' in a replacement string now refers to the count of | ||
| 530 | replacements already made by the replacement command. All regular | ||
| 531 | expression replacement commands now allow `\?' in the replacement | ||
| 532 | string to specify a position where the replacement string can be | ||
| 533 | edited for each replacement. `query-replace-regexp-eval' is now | ||
| 534 | deprecated since it offers no additional functionality. | ||
| 535 | |||
| 536 | *** query-replace uses isearch lazy highlighting when the new user option | ||
| 537 | `query-replace-lazy-highlight' is non-nil. | ||
| 538 | |||
| 539 | *** The current match in query-replace is highlighted in new face | ||
| 540 | `query-replace' which by default inherits from isearch face. | ||
| 541 | |||
| 542 | *** New user option `query-replace-skip-read-only': when non-nil, | ||
| 543 | `query-replace' and related functions simply ignore | ||
| 544 | a match if part of it has a read-only property. | ||
| 545 | |||
| 546 | ** Local variables lists: | ||
| 547 | |||
| 548 | *** If the local variables list contains any variable-value pairs that | ||
| 549 | are not known to be safe, Emacs shows a prompt asking whether to apply | ||
| 550 | the local variables list as a whole. In earlier versions, a prompt | ||
| 551 | was only issued for variables explicitly marked as risky (for the | ||
| 552 | definition of risky variables, see `risky-local-variable-p'). | ||
| 553 | |||
| 554 | At the prompt, you can choose to save the contents of this local | ||
| 555 | variables list to `safe-local-variable-values'. This new customizable | ||
| 556 | option is a list of variable-value pairs that are known to be safe. | ||
| 557 | Variables can also be marked as safe with the existing | ||
| 558 | `safe-local-variable' property (see `safe-local-variable-p'). | ||
| 559 | However, risky variables will not be added to | ||
| 560 | `safe-local-variable-values' in this way. | ||
| 561 | |||
| 562 | *** The variable `enable-local-variables' controls how local variable | ||
| 563 | lists are handled. t, the default, specifies the standard querying | ||
| 564 | behavior. :safe means use only safe values, and ignore the rest. | ||
| 565 | :all means set all variables, whether or not they are safe. | ||
| 566 | nil means ignore them all. Anything else means always query. | ||
| 567 | |||
| 568 | *** The variable `safe-local-eval-forms' specifies a list of forms that | ||
| 569 | are ok to evaluate when they appear in an `eval' local variables | ||
| 570 | specification. Normally Emacs asks for confirmation before evaluating | ||
| 571 | such a form, but if the form appears in this list, no confirmation is | ||
| 572 | needed. | ||
| 573 | |||
| 574 | *** If a function has a non-nil `safe-local-eval-function' property, | ||
| 575 | that means it is ok to evaluate some calls to that function when it | ||
| 576 | appears in an `eval' local variables specification. If the property | ||
| 577 | is t, then any form calling that function with constant arguments is | ||
| 578 | ok. If the property is a function or list of functions, they are called | ||
| 579 | with the form as argument, and if any returns t, the form is ok to call. | ||
| 580 | |||
| 581 | If the form is not "ok to call", that means Emacs asks for | ||
| 582 | confirmation as before. | ||
| 583 | |||
| 584 | *** In processing a local variables list, Emacs strips the prefix and | ||
| 585 | suffix from every line before processing all the lines. | ||
| 586 | |||
| 587 | *** Text properties in local variables. | ||
| 588 | |||
| 589 | A file local variables list cannot specify a string with text | ||
| 590 | properties--any specified text properties are discarded. | ||
| 591 | |||
| 592 | ** File operation changes: | ||
| 593 | |||
| 594 | *** Unquoted `$' in file names do not signal an error any more when | ||
| 595 | the corresponding environment variable does not exist. | ||
| 596 | Instead, the `$ENVVAR' text is left as is, so that `$$' quoting | ||
| 597 | is only rarely needed. | ||
| 598 | |||
| 599 | *** C-x C-f RET, typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer a special case. | ||
| 600 | |||
| 601 | Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect | ||
| 602 | of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the | ||
| 603 | directory with Dired. | ||
| 604 | |||
| 605 | *** C-x s (save-some-buffers) now offers an option `d' to diff a buffer | ||
| 606 | against its file, so you can see what changes you would be saving. | ||
| 607 | |||
| 608 | *** Auto Compression mode is now enabled by default. | ||
| 609 | |||
| 610 | *** If the user visits a file larger than `large-file-warning-threshold', | ||
| 611 | Emacs asks for confirmation. | ||
| 612 | |||
| 613 | *** The commands copy-file, rename-file, make-symbolic-link and | ||
| 614 | add-name-to-file, when given a directory as the "new name" argument, | ||
| 615 | convert it to a file name by merging in the within-directory part of | ||
| 616 | the existing file's name. (This is the same convention that shell | ||
| 617 | commands cp, mv, and ln follow.) Thus, M-x copy-file RET ~/foo RET | ||
| 618 | /tmp RET copies ~/foo to /tmp/foo. | ||
| 619 | |||
| 620 | *** require-final-newline now has two new possible values: | ||
| 621 | |||
| 622 | `visit' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's needed | ||
| 623 | when visiting the file. | ||
| 624 | |||
| 625 | `visit-save' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's | ||
| 626 | needed when visiting the file, and also add a newline if it's needed | ||
| 627 | when saving the file. | ||
| 628 | |||
| 629 | *** The new option mode-require-final-newline controls how certain | ||
| 630 | major modes enable require-final-newline. Any major mode that's | ||
| 631 | designed for a kind of file that should normally end in a newline | ||
| 632 | sets require-final-newline based on mode-require-final-newline. | ||
| 633 | So you can customize mode-require-final-newline to control what these | ||
| 634 | modes do. | ||
| 635 | |||
| 636 | *** When you are root, and you visit a file whose modes specify | ||
| 637 | read-only, the Emacs buffer is now read-only too. Type C-x C-q if you | ||
| 638 | want to make the buffer writable. (As root, you can in fact alter the | ||
| 639 | file.) | ||
| 640 | |||
| 641 | *** find-file-read-only visits multiple files in read-only mode, | ||
| 642 | when the file name contains wildcard characters. | ||
| 643 | |||
| 644 | *** find-alternate-file replaces the current file with multiple files, | ||
| 645 | when the file name contains wildcard characters. It now asks if you | ||
| 646 | wish save your changes and not just offer to kill the buffer. | ||
| 647 | |||
| 648 | *** When used interactively, `format-write-file' now asks for confirmation | ||
| 649 | before overwriting an existing file, unless a prefix argument is | ||
| 650 | supplied. This behavior is analogous to `write-file'. | ||
| 651 | |||
| 652 | *** The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' now has a third element that | ||
| 653 | controls whether or not the function `make-auto-save-file-name' will | ||
| 654 | attempt to construct a unique auto-save name (e.g. for remote files). | ||
| 655 | |||
| 656 | *** The new option `write-region-inhibit-fsync' disables calls to fsync | ||
| 657 | in `write-region'. This can be useful on laptops to avoid spinning up | ||
| 658 | the hard drive upon each file save. Enabling this variable may result | ||
| 659 | in data loss, use with care. | ||
| 660 | |||
| 661 | ** Minibuffer changes: | ||
| 662 | |||
| 663 | *** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only | ||
| 664 | to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point, | ||
| 665 | it remains unchanged. | ||
| 666 | |||
| 667 | *** The new file-name-shadow-mode is turned ON by default, so that when | ||
| 668 | entering a file name, any prefix which Emacs will ignore is dimmed. | ||
| 669 | |||
| 670 | *** There's a new face `minibuffer-prompt'. | ||
| 671 | Emacs adds this face to the list of text properties stored in the | ||
| 672 | variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is used to display the | ||
| 673 | prompt string. | ||
| 674 | |||
| 675 | *** Enhanced visual feedback in `*Completions*' buffer. | ||
| 676 | |||
| 677 | Completions lists use faces to highlight what all completions | ||
| 678 | have in common and where they begin to differ. | ||
| 679 | |||
| 680 | The common prefix shared by all possible completions uses the face | ||
| 681 | `completions-common-part', while the first character that isn't the | ||
| 682 | same uses the face `completions-first-difference'. By default, | ||
| 683 | `completions-common-part' inherits from `default', and | ||
| 684 | `completions-first-difference' inherits from `bold'. The idea of | ||
| 685 | `completions-common-part' is that you can use it to make the common | ||
| 686 | parts less visible than normal, so that the rest of the differing | ||
| 687 | parts is, by contrast, slightly highlighted. | ||
| 688 | |||
| 689 | Above fontification is always done when listing completions is | ||
| 690 | triggered at minibuffer. If you want to fontify completions whose | ||
| 691 | listing is triggered at the other normal buffer, you have to pass | ||
| 692 | the common prefix of completions to `display-completion-list' as | ||
| 693 | its second argument. | ||
| 694 | |||
| 695 | *** File-name completion can now ignore specified directories. | ||
| 696 | If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a | ||
| 697 | slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when | ||
| 698 | completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions' | ||
| 699 | which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion | ||
| 700 | candidate is a directory. | ||
| 701 | |||
| 702 | *** New user option `history-delete-duplicates'. | ||
| 703 | If set to t when adding a new history element, all previous identical | ||
| 704 | elements are deleted from the history list. | ||
| 705 | |||
| 706 | ** Redisplay changes: | ||
| 707 | |||
| 708 | *** The new face `mode-line-inactive' is used to display the mode line | ||
| 709 | of non-selected windows. The `mode-line' face is now used to display | ||
| 710 | the mode line of the currently selected window. | ||
| 711 | |||
| 712 | The new variable `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' controls whether | ||
| 713 | the `mode-line-inactive' face is used. | ||
| 714 | |||
| 715 | *** The mode line position information now comes before the major mode. | ||
| 716 | When the file is maintained under version control, that information | ||
| 717 | appears between the position information and the major mode. | ||
| 718 | |||
| 719 | *** You can now customize the use of window fringes. To control this | ||
| 720 | for all frames, use M-x fringe-mode or the Show/Hide submenu of the | ||
| 721 | top-level Options menu, or customize the `fringe-mode' variable. To | ||
| 722 | control this for a specific frame, use the command M-x | ||
| 723 | set-fringe-style. | ||
| 724 | |||
| 725 | *** Angle icons in the fringes can indicate the buffer boundaries. In | ||
| 726 | addition, up and down arrow bitmaps in the fringe indicate which ways | ||
| 727 | the window can be scrolled. | ||
| 728 | |||
| 729 | This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable | ||
| 730 | `indicate-buffer-boundaries' to a non-nil value. The default value of | ||
| 731 | this variable is found in `default-indicate-buffer-boundaries'. | ||
| 732 | |||
| 733 | If value is `left' or `right', both angle and arrow bitmaps are | ||
| 734 | displayed in the left or right fringe, resp. | ||
| 735 | |||
| 736 | The value can also be an alist which specifies the presence and | ||
| 737 | position of each bitmap individually. | ||
| 738 | |||
| 739 | For example, ((top . left) (t . right)) places the top angle bitmap | ||
| 740 | in left fringe, the bottom angle bitmap in right fringe, and both | ||
| 741 | arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show just the angle bitmaps in the | ||
| 742 | left fringe, but no arrow bitmaps, use ((top . left) (bottom . left)). | ||
| 743 | |||
| 744 | *** On window systems, lines which are exactly as wide as the window | ||
| 745 | (not counting the final newline character) are no longer broken into | ||
| 746 | two lines on the display (with just the newline on the second line). | ||
| 747 | Instead, the newline now "overflows" into the right fringe, and the | ||
| 748 | cursor will be displayed in the fringe when positioned on that newline. | ||
| 749 | |||
| 750 | The new user option 'overflow-newline-into-fringe' can be set to nil to | ||
| 751 | revert to the old behavior of continuing such lines. | ||
| 752 | |||
| 753 | *** A window can now have individual fringe and scroll-bar settings, | ||
| 754 | in addition to the individual display margin settings. | ||
| 755 | |||
| 756 | Such individual settings are now preserved when windows are split | ||
| 757 | horizontally or vertically, a saved window configuration is restored, | ||
| 758 | or when the frame is resized. | ||
| 759 | |||
| 760 | *** When a window has display margin areas, the fringes are now | ||
| 761 | displayed between the margins and the buffer's text area, rather than | ||
| 762 | outside those margins. | ||
| 763 | |||
| 764 | *** New face `escape-glyph' highlights control characters and escape glyphs. | ||
| 765 | |||
| 766 | *** Non-breaking space and hyphens are now displayed with a special | ||
| 767 | face, either nobreak-space or escape-glyph. You can turn this off or | ||
| 768 | specify a different mode by setting the variable `nobreak-char-display'. | ||
| 769 | |||
| 770 | *** The parameters of automatic hscrolling can now be customized. | ||
| 771 | The variable `hscroll-margin' determines how many columns away from | ||
| 772 | the window edge point is allowed to get before automatic hscrolling | ||
| 773 | will horizontally scroll the window. The default value is 5. | ||
| 774 | |||
| 775 | The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns automatic | ||
| 776 | hscrolling scrolls the window when point gets too close to the | ||
| 777 | window edge. If its value is zero, the default, Emacs scrolls the | ||
| 778 | window so as to center point. If its value is an integer, it says how | ||
| 779 | many columns to scroll. If the value is a floating-point number, it | ||
| 780 | gives the fraction of the window's width to scroll the window. | ||
| 781 | |||
| 782 | The variable `automatic-hscrolling' was renamed to | ||
| 783 | `auto-hscroll-mode'. The old name is still available as an alias. | ||
| 784 | |||
| 785 | *** Moving or scrolling through images (and other lines) taller than | ||
| 786 | the window now works sensibly, by automatically adjusting the window's | ||
| 787 | vscroll property. | ||
| 788 | |||
| 789 | *** Preemptive redisplay now adapts to current load and bandwidth. | ||
| 790 | |||
| 791 | To avoid preempting redisplay on fast computers, networks, and displays, | ||
| 792 | the arrival of new input is now performed at regular intervals during | ||
| 793 | redisplay. The new variable `redisplay-preemption-period' specifies | ||
| 794 | the period; the default is to check for input every 0.1 seconds. | ||
| 795 | |||
| 796 | *** The %c and %l constructs are now ignored in frame-title-format. | ||
| 797 | Due to technical limitations in how Emacs interacts with windowing | ||
| 798 | systems, these constructs often failed to render properly, and could | ||
| 799 | even cause Emacs to crash. | ||
| 800 | |||
| 801 | *** If value of `auto-resize-tool-bars' is `grow-only', the tool bar | ||
| 802 | will expand as needed, but not contract automatically. To contract | ||
| 803 | the tool bar, you must type C-l. | ||
| 804 | |||
| 805 | *** New customize option `overline-margin' controls the space between | ||
| 806 | overline and text. | ||
| 807 | |||
| 808 | *** New variable `x-underline-at-descent-line' controls the relative | ||
| 809 | position of the underline. When set, it overrides the | ||
| 810 | `x-use-underline-position-properties' variables. | ||
| 811 | |||
| 812 | ** New faces: | ||
| 813 | |||
| 814 | *** `mode-line-highlight' is the standard face indicating mouse sensitive | ||
| 815 | elements on mode-line (and header-line) like `highlight' face on text | ||
| 816 | areas. | ||
| 817 | |||
| 818 | *** `mode-line-buffer-id' is the standard face for buffer identification | ||
| 819 | parts of the mode line. | ||
| 820 | |||
| 821 | *** `shadow' face defines the appearance of the "shadowed" text, i.e. | ||
| 822 | the text which should be less noticeable than the surrounding text. | ||
| 823 | This can be achieved by using shades of grey in contrast with either | ||
| 824 | black or white default foreground color. This generic shadow face | ||
| 825 | allows customization of the appearance of shadowed text in one place, | ||
| 826 | so package-specific faces can inherit from it. | ||
| 827 | |||
| 828 | *** `vertical-border' face is used for the vertical divider between windows. | ||
| 829 | |||
| 830 | ** Font-Lock (syntax highlighting) changes: | ||
| 831 | |||
| 832 | *** All modes now support using M-x font-lock-mode to toggle | ||
| 833 | fontification, even those such as Occur, Info, and comint-derived | ||
| 834 | modes that do their own fontification in a special way. | ||
| 835 | |||
| 836 | The variable `Info-fontify' is no longer applicable; to disable | ||
| 837 | fontification in Info, remove `turn-on-font-lock' from | ||
| 838 | `Info-mode-hook'. | ||
| 839 | |||
| 840 | *** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-comment-delimiter-face'. | ||
| 841 | |||
| 842 | *** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-preprocessor-face'. | ||
| 843 | |||
| 844 | *** Easy to overlook single character negation can now be font-locked. | ||
| 845 | You can use the new variable `font-lock-negation-char-face' and the face of | ||
| 846 | the same name to customize this. Currently the cc-modes, sh-script-mode, | ||
| 847 | cperl-mode and make-mode support this. | ||
| 848 | |||
| 849 | *** Font-Lock mode: in major modes such as Lisp mode, where some Emacs | ||
| 850 | features assume that an open-paren in column 0 is always outside of | ||
| 851 | any string or comment, Font-Lock now highlights any such open-paren in | ||
| 852 | bold-red if it is inside a string or a comment, to indicate that it | ||
| 853 | can cause trouble. You should rewrite the string or comment so that | ||
| 854 | the open-paren is not in column 0. | ||
| 855 | |||
| 856 | *** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties; | ||
| 857 | M-o M-o requests refontification. | ||
| 858 | |||
| 859 | *** The default settings for JIT stealth lock parameters are changed. | ||
| 860 | The default value for the user option jit-lock-stealth-time is now nil | ||
| 861 | instead of 3. This setting of jit-lock-stealth-time disables stealth | ||
| 862 | fontification: on today's machines, it may be a bug in font lock | ||
| 863 | patterns if fontification otherwise noticeably degrades interactivity. | ||
| 864 | If you find movement in infrequently visited buffers sluggish (and the | ||
| 865 | major mode maintainer has no better idea), customizing | ||
| 866 | jit-lock-stealth-time to a non-nil value will let Emacs fontify | ||
| 867 | buffers in the background when it considers the system to be idle. | ||
| 868 | jit-lock-stealth-nice is now 0.5 instead of 0.125 which is supposed to | ||
| 869 | cause less load than the old defaults. | ||
| 870 | |||
| 871 | *** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'. | ||
| 872 | |||
| 873 | If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs | ||
| 874 | idle time in seconds to wait before starting fontification. For | ||
| 875 | example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will | ||
| 876 | only happen after 0.25s of idle time. | ||
| 877 | |||
| 878 | *** contextual refontification is now separate from stealth fontification. | ||
| 879 | |||
| 880 | jit-lock-defer-contextually is renamed jit-lock-contextually and | ||
| 881 | jit-lock-context-time determines the delay after which contextual | ||
| 882 | refontification takes place. | ||
| 883 | |||
| 884 | *** lazy-lock is considered obsolete. | ||
| 885 | |||
| 886 | The `lazy-lock' package is superseded by `jit-lock' and is considered | ||
| 887 | obsolete. `jit-lock' is activated by default; if you wish to continue | ||
| 888 | using `lazy-lock', activate it in your ~/.emacs like this: | ||
| 889 | (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode) | ||
| 890 | |||
| 891 | If you invoke `lazy-lock-mode' directly rather than through | ||
| 892 | `font-lock-support-mode', it now issues a warning: | ||
| 893 | "Use font-lock-support-mode rather than calling lazy-lock-mode" | ||
| 894 | |||
| 895 | ** Menu support: | ||
| 896 | |||
| 897 | *** A menu item "Show/Hide" was added to the top-level menu "Options". | ||
| 898 | This menu allows you to turn various display features on and off (such | ||
| 899 | as the fringes, the tool bar, the speedbar, and the menu bar itself). | ||
| 900 | You can also move the vertical scroll bar to either side here or turn | ||
| 901 | it off completely. There is also a menu-item to toggle displaying of | ||
| 902 | current date and time, current line and column number in the mode-line. | ||
| 903 | |||
| 904 | *** Speedbar has moved from the "Tools" top level menu to "Show/Hide". | ||
| 905 | |||
| 906 | *** The menu item "Open File..." has been split into two items, "New File..." | ||
| 907 | and "Open File...". "Open File..." now opens only existing files. This is | ||
| 908 | to support existing GUI file selection dialogs better. | ||
| 909 | |||
| 910 | *** The file selection dialog for Gtk+, Mac, W32 and Motif/LessTif can be | ||
| 911 | disabled by customizing the variable `use-file-dialog'. | ||
| 912 | |||
| 913 | *** The pop up menus for Lucid now stay up if you do a fast click and can | ||
| 914 | be navigated with the arrow keys (like Gtk+, Mac and W32). | ||
| 915 | |||
| 916 | *** The menu bar for Motif/LessTif/Lucid/Gtk+ can be navigated with keys. | ||
| 917 | Pressing F10 shows the first menu in the menu bar. Navigation is done with | ||
| 918 | the arrow keys, select with the return key and cancel with the escape keys. | ||
| 919 | |||
| 920 | *** The Lucid menus can display multilingual text in your locale. You have | ||
| 921 | to explicitly specify a fontSet resource for this to work, for example | ||
| 922 | `-xrm "Emacs*fontSet: -*-helvetica-medium-r-*--*-120-*-*-*-*-*-*,*"'. | ||
| 923 | |||
| 924 | *** Dialogs for Lucid/Athena and LessTif/Motif now pop down on pressing | ||
| 925 | ESC, like they do for Gtk+, Mac and W32. | ||
| 926 | |||
| 927 | *** For the Gtk+ version, you can make Emacs use the old file dialog | ||
| 928 | by setting the variable `x-gtk-use-old-file-dialog' to t. Default is to use | ||
| 929 | the new dialog. | ||
| 930 | |||
| 931 | *** You can exit dialog windows and menus by typing C-g. | ||
| 932 | |||
| 933 | ** Buffer Menu changes: | ||
| 934 | |||
| 935 | *** The new options `buffers-menu-show-directories' and | ||
| 936 | `buffers-menu-show-status' let you control how buffers are displayed | ||
| 937 | in the menu dropped down when you click "Buffers" from the menu bar. | ||
| 938 | |||
| 939 | `buffers-menu-show-directories' controls whether the menu displays | ||
| 940 | leading directories as part of the file name visited by the buffer. | ||
| 941 | If its value is `unless-uniquify', the default, directories are | ||
| 942 | shown unless uniquify-buffer-name-style' is non-nil. The value of nil | ||
| 943 | and t turn the display of directories off and on, respectively. | ||
| 944 | |||
| 945 | `buffers-menu-show-status' controls whether the Buffers menu includes | ||
| 946 | the modified and read-only status of the buffers. By default it is | ||
| 947 | t, and the status is shown. | ||
| 948 | |||
| 949 | Setting these variables directly does not take effect until next time | ||
| 950 | the Buffers menu is regenerated. | ||
| 951 | |||
| 952 | *** New command `Buffer-menu-toggle-files-only' toggles display of file | ||
| 953 | buffers only in the Buffer Menu. It is bound to T in Buffer Menu | ||
| 954 | mode. | ||
| 955 | |||
| 956 | *** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin | ||
| 957 | with a space, when those buffers are visiting files. Normally buffers | ||
| 958 | whose names begin with space are omitted. | ||
| 959 | |||
| 960 | ** Mouse changes: | ||
| 961 | |||
| 962 | *** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link. | ||
| 963 | |||
| 964 | Traditionally, Emacs uses a Mouse-1 click to set point and a Mouse-2 | ||
| 965 | click to follow a link, whereas most other applications use a Mouse-1 | ||
| 966 | click for both purposes, depending on whether you click outside or | ||
| 967 | inside a link. Now the behavior of a Mouse-1 click has been changed | ||
| 968 | to match this context-sensitive dual behavior. (If you prefer the old | ||
| 969 | behavior, set the user option `mouse-1-click-follows-link' to nil.) | ||
| 970 | |||
| 971 | Depending on the current mode, a Mouse-2 click in Emacs can do much | ||
| 972 | more than just follow a link, so the new Mouse-1 behavior is only | ||
| 973 | activated for modes which explicitly mark a clickable text as a "link" | ||
| 974 | (see the new function `mouse-on-link-p' for details). The Lisp | ||
| 975 | packages that are included in release 22.1 have been adapted to do | ||
| 976 | this, but external packages may not yet support this. However, there | ||
| 977 | is no risk in using such packages, as the worst thing that could | ||
| 978 | happen is that you get the original Mouse-1 behavior when you click | ||
| 979 | on a link, which typically means that you set point where you click. | ||
| 980 | |||
| 981 | If you want to get the original Mouse-1 action also inside a link, you | ||
| 982 | just need to press the Mouse-1 button a little longer than a normal | ||
| 983 | click (i.e. press and hold the Mouse-1 button for half a second before | ||
| 984 | you release it). | ||
| 985 | |||
| 986 | Dragging the Mouse-1 inside a link still performs the original | ||
| 987 | drag-mouse-1 action, typically copy the text. | ||
| 988 | |||
| 989 | You can customize the new Mouse-1 behavior via the new user options | ||
| 990 | `mouse-1-click-follows-link' and `mouse-1-click-in-non-selected-windows'. | ||
| 991 | |||
| 992 | *** If you set the new variable `mouse-autoselect-window' to a non-nil | ||
| 993 | value, windows are automatically selected as you move the mouse from | ||
| 994 | one Emacs window to another, even within a frame. A minibuffer window | ||
| 995 | can be selected only when it is active. | ||
| 996 | |||
| 997 | *** On X, when the window manager requires that you click on a frame to | ||
| 998 | select it (give it focus), the selected window and cursor position | ||
| 999 | normally changes according to the mouse click position. If you set | ||
| 1000 | the variable x-mouse-click-focus-ignore-position to t, the selected | ||
| 1001 | window and cursor position do not change when you click on a frame | ||
| 1002 | to give it focus. | ||
| 1003 | |||
| 1004 | *** Emacs normally highlights mouse sensitive text whenever the mouse | ||
| 1005 | is over the text. By setting the new variable `mouse-highlight', you | ||
| 1006 | can optionally enable mouse highlighting only after you move the | ||
| 1007 | mouse, so that highlighting disappears when you press a key. You can | ||
| 1008 | also disable mouse highlighting. | ||
| 1009 | |||
| 1010 | *** You can now customize if selecting a region by dragging the mouse | ||
| 1011 | shall not copy the selected text to the kill-ring by setting the new | ||
| 1012 | variable mouse-drag-copy-region to nil. | ||
| 1013 | |||
| 1014 | *** Under X, mouse-wheel-mode is turned on by default. | ||
| 1015 | |||
| 1016 | *** Emacs ignores mouse-2 clicks while the mouse wheel is being moved. | ||
| 1017 | |||
| 1018 | People tend to push the mouse wheel (which counts as a mouse-2 click) | ||
| 1019 | unintentionally while turning the wheel, so these clicks are now | ||
| 1020 | ignored. You can customize this with the mouse-wheel-click-event and | ||
| 1021 | mouse-wheel-inhibit-click-time variables. | ||
| 1022 | |||
| 1023 | *** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window | ||
| 1024 | (rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'. | ||
| 1025 | |||
| 1026 | ** Multilingual Environment (Mule) changes: | ||
| 1027 | |||
| 1028 | *** You can disable character translation for a file using the -*- | ||
| 1029 | construct. Include `enable-character-translation: nil' inside the | ||
| 1030 | -*-...-*- to disable any character translation that may happen by | ||
| 1031 | various global and per-coding-system translation tables. You can also | ||
| 1032 | specify it in a local variable list at the end of the file. For | ||
| 1033 | shortcut, instead of using this long variable name, you can append the | ||
| 1034 | character "!" at the end of coding-system name specified in -*- | ||
| 1035 | construct or in a local variable list. For example, if a file has the | ||
| 1036 | following header, it is decoded by the coding system `iso-latin-1' | ||
| 1037 | without any character translation: | ||
| 1038 | ;; -*- coding: iso-latin-1!; -*- | ||
| 1039 | |||
| 1040 | *** Language environment and various default coding systems are setup | ||
| 1041 | more correctly according to the current locale name. If the locale | ||
| 1042 | name doesn't specify a charset, the default is what glibc defines. | ||
| 1043 | This change can result in using the different coding systems as | ||
| 1044 | default in some locale (e.g. vi_VN). | ||
| 1045 | |||
| 1046 | *** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on your | ||
| 1047 | current locale settings if you are not using a window system. This | ||
| 1048 | can mean that the META key doesn't work but generates non-ASCII | ||
| 1049 | characters instead, depending on how the terminal (or terminal | ||
| 1050 | emulator) works. Use `set-keyboard-coding-system' (or customize | ||
| 1051 | keyboard-coding-system) if you prefer META to work (the old default) | ||
| 1052 | or if the locale doesn't describe the character set actually generated | ||
| 1053 | by the keyboard. See Info node `Unibyte Mode'. | ||
| 1054 | |||
| 1055 | *** The new command `set-file-name-coding-system' (C-x RET F) sets | ||
| 1056 | coding system for encoding and decoding file names. A new menu item | ||
| 1057 | (Options->Mule->Set Coding Systems->For File Name) invokes this | ||
| 1058 | command. | ||
| 1059 | |||
| 1060 | *** The new command `revert-buffer-with-coding-system' (C-x RET r) | ||
| 1061 | revisits the current file using a coding system that you specify. | ||
| 1062 | |||
| 1063 | *** New command `recode-region' decodes the region again by a specified | ||
| 1064 | coding system. | ||
| 1065 | |||
| 1066 | *** The new command `recode-file-name' changes the encoding of the name | ||
| 1067 | of a file. | ||
| 1068 | |||
| 1069 | *** New command `ucs-insert' inserts a character specified by its | ||
| 1070 | unicode. | ||
| 1071 | |||
| 1072 | *** New command quail-show-key shows what key (or key sequence) to type | ||
| 1073 | in the current input method to input a character at point. | ||
| 1074 | |||
| 1075 | *** Limited support for character `unification' has been added. | ||
| 1076 | Emacs now knows how to translate between different representations of | ||
| 1077 | the same characters in various Emacs charsets according to standard | ||
| 1078 | Unicode mappings. This applies mainly to characters in the ISO 8859 | ||
| 1079 | sets plus some other 8-bit sets, but can be extended. For instance, | ||
| 1080 | translation works amongst the Emacs ...-iso8859-... charsets and the | ||
| 1081 | mule-unicode-... ones. | ||
| 1082 | |||
| 1083 | By default this translation happens automatically on encoding. | ||
| 1084 | Self-inserting characters are translated to make the input conformant | ||
| 1085 | with the encoding of the buffer in which it's being used, where | ||
| 1086 | possible. | ||
| 1087 | |||
| 1088 | You can force a more complete unification with the user option | ||
| 1089 | unify-8859-on-decoding-mode. That maps all the Latin-N character sets | ||
| 1090 | into Unicode characters (from the latin-iso8859-1 and | ||
| 1091 | mule-unicode-0100-24ff charsets) on decoding. Note that this mode | ||
| 1092 | will often effectively clobber data with an iso-2022 encoding. | ||
| 1093 | |||
| 1094 | *** New language environments (set up automatically according to the | ||
| 1095 | locale): Belarusian, Bulgarian, Chinese-EUC-TW, Croatian, Esperanto, | ||
| 1096 | French, Georgian, Italian, Latin-7, Latvian, Lithuanian, Malayalam, | ||
| 1097 | Russian, Russian, Slovenian, Swedish, Tajik, Tamil, UTF-8,Ukrainian, | ||
| 1098 | Welsh,Latin-6, Windows-1255. | ||
| 1099 | |||
| 1100 | *** New input methods: latin-alt-postfix, latin-postfix, latin-prefix, | ||
| 1101 | belarusian, bulgarian-bds, bulgarian-phonetic, chinese-sisheng (for | ||
| 1102 | Chinese Pinyin characters), croatian, dutch, georgian, latvian-keyboard, | ||
| 1103 | lithuanian-numeric, lithuanian-keyboard, malayalam-inscript, rfc1345, | ||
| 1104 | russian-computer, sgml, slovenian, tamil-inscript, ukrainian-computer, | ||
| 1105 | ucs, vietnamese-telex, welsh. | ||
| 1106 | |||
| 1107 | *** There is support for decoding Greek and Cyrillic characters into | ||
| 1108 | either Unicode (the mule-unicode charsets) or the iso-8859 charsets, | ||
| 1109 | when possible. The latter are more space-efficient. | ||
| 1110 | This is controlled by user option utf-fragment-on-decoding. | ||
| 1111 | |||
| 1112 | *** Improved Thai support. A new minor mode `thai-word-mode' (which is | ||
| 1113 | automatically activated if you select Thai as a language | ||
| 1114 | environment) changes key bindings of most word-oriented commands to | ||
| 1115 | versions which recognize Thai words. Affected commands are | ||
| 1116 | M-f (forward-word) | ||
| 1117 | M-b (backward-word) | ||
| 1118 | M-d (kill-word) | ||
| 1119 | M-DEL (backward-kill-word) | ||
| 1120 | M-t (transpose-words) | ||
| 1121 | M-q (fill-paragraph) | ||
| 1122 | |||
| 1123 | *** Indian support has been updated. | ||
| 1124 | The in-is13194 coding system is now Unicode-based. CDAC fonts are | ||
| 1125 | assumed. There is a framework for supporting various Indian scripts, | ||
| 1126 | but currently only Devanagari, Malayalam and Tamil are supported. | ||
| 1127 | |||
| 1128 | *** The utf-8/16 coding systems have been enhanced. | ||
| 1129 | By default, untranslatable utf-8 sequences are simply composed into | ||
| 1130 | single quasi-characters. User option `utf-translate-cjk-mode' (it is | ||
| 1131 | turned on by default) arranges to translate many utf-8 CJK character | ||
| 1132 | sequences into real Emacs characters in a similar way to the Mule-UCS | ||
| 1133 | system. As this loads a fairly big data on demand, people who are not | ||
| 1134 | interested in CJK characters may want to customize it to nil. | ||
| 1135 | You can augment/amend the CJK translation via hash tables | ||
| 1136 | `ucs-mule-cjk-to-unicode' and `ucs-unicode-to-mule-cjk'. The utf-8 | ||
| 1137 | coding system now also encodes characters from most of Emacs's | ||
| 1138 | one-dimensional internal charsets, specifically the ISO-8859 ones. | ||
| 1139 | The utf-16 coding system is affected similarly. | ||
| 1140 | |||
| 1141 | *** A UTF-7 coding system is available in the library `utf-7'. | ||
| 1142 | |||
| 1143 | *** A new coding system `euc-tw' has been added for traditional Chinese | ||
| 1144 | in CNS encoding; it accepts both Big 5 and CNS as input; on saving, | ||
| 1145 | Big 5 is then converted to CNS. | ||
| 1146 | |||
| 1147 | *** Many new coding systems are available in the `code-pages' library. | ||
| 1148 | These include complete versions of most of those in codepage.el, based | ||
| 1149 | on Unicode mappings. `codepage-setup' is now obsolete and is used | ||
| 1150 | only in the MS-DOS port of Emacs. All coding systems defined in | ||
| 1151 | `code-pages' are auto-loaded. | ||
| 1152 | |||
| 1153 | *** New variable `utf-translate-cjk-unicode-range' controls which | ||
| 1154 | Unicode characters to translate in `utf-translate-cjk-mode'. | ||
| 1155 | |||
| 1156 | *** iso-10646-1 (`Unicode') fonts can be used to display any range of | ||
| 1157 | characters encodable by the utf-8 coding system. Just specify the | ||
| 1158 | fontset appropriately. | ||
| 1159 | |||
| 1160 | ** Customize changes: | ||
| 1161 | |||
| 1162 | *** Custom themes are collections of customize options. Create a | ||
| 1163 | custom theme with M-x customize-create-theme. Use M-x load-theme to | ||
| 1164 | load and enable a theme, and M-x disable-theme to disable it. Use M-x | ||
| 1165 | enable-theme to enable a disabled theme. | ||
| 1166 | |||
| 1167 | *** The commands M-x customize-face and M-x customize-face-other-window | ||
| 1168 | now look at the character after point. If a face or faces are | ||
| 1169 | specified for that character, the commands by default customize those | ||
| 1170 | faces. | ||
| 1171 | |||
| 1172 | *** The face-customization widget has been reworked to be less confusing. | ||
| 1173 | In particular, when you enable a face attribute using the corresponding | ||
| 1174 | check-box, there's no longer a redundant `*' option in value selection | ||
| 1175 | for that attribute; the values you can choose are only those which make | ||
| 1176 | sense for the attribute. When an attribute is de-selected by unchecking | ||
| 1177 | its check-box, then the (now ignored, but still present temporarily in | ||
| 1178 | case you re-select the attribute) value is hidden. | ||
| 1179 | |||
| 1180 | *** When you set or reset a variable's value in a Customize buffer, | ||
| 1181 | the previous value becomes the "backup value" of the variable. | ||
| 1182 | You can go back to that backup value by selecting "Use Backup Value" | ||
| 1183 | under the "[State]" button. | ||
| 1184 | |||
| 1185 | ** Dired mode: | ||
| 1186 | |||
| 1187 | *** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now | ||
| 1188 | control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded | ||
| 1189 | by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards | ||
| 1190 | too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the | ||
| 1191 | double quotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent | ||
| 1192 | special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'. | ||
| 1193 | |||
| 1194 | *** The Dired command `dired-goto-file' is now bound to j, not M-g. | ||
| 1195 | This is to avoid hiding the global key binding of M-g. | ||
| 1196 | |||
| 1197 | *** New faces dired-header, dired-mark, dired-marked, dired-flagged, | ||
| 1198 | dired-ignored, dired-directory, dired-symlink, dired-warning | ||
| 1199 | introduced for Dired mode instead of font-lock faces. | ||
| 1200 | |||
| 1201 | *** New Dired command `dired-compare-directories' marks files | ||
| 1202 | with different file attributes in two dired buffers. | ||
| 1203 | |||
| 1204 | *** New Dired command `dired-do-touch' (bound to T) changes timestamps | ||
| 1205 | of marked files with the value entered in the minibuffer. | ||
| 1206 | |||
| 1207 | *** In Dired, the w command now stores the current line's file name | ||
| 1208 | into the kill ring. With a zero prefix arg, it stores the absolute file name. | ||
| 1209 | |||
| 1210 | *** In Dired-x, Omitting files is now a minor mode, dired-omit-mode. | ||
| 1211 | |||
| 1212 | The mode toggling command is bound to M-o. A new command | ||
| 1213 | dired-mark-omitted, bound to * O, marks omitted files. The variable | ||
| 1214 | dired-omit-files-p is obsoleted, use the mode toggling function | ||
| 1215 | instead. | ||
| 1216 | |||
| 1217 | *** The variables dired-free-space-program and dired-free-space-args | ||
| 1218 | have been renamed to directory-free-space-program and | ||
| 1219 | directory-free-space-args, and they now apply whenever Emacs puts a | ||
| 1220 | directory listing into a buffer. | ||
| 1221 | |||
| 1222 | ** Comint changes: | ||
| 1223 | |||
| 1224 | *** The new INSIDE_EMACS environment variable is set to "t" in subshells | ||
| 1225 | running inside Emacs. This supersedes the EMACS environment variable, | ||
| 1226 | which will be removed in a future Emacs release. Programs that need | ||
| 1227 | to know whether they are started inside Emacs should check INSIDE_EMACS | ||
| 1228 | instead of EMACS. | ||
| 1229 | |||
| 1230 | *** The comint prompt can now be made read-only, using the new user | ||
| 1231 | option `comint-prompt-read-only'. This is not enabled by default, | ||
| 1232 | except in IELM buffers. The read-only status of IELM prompts can be | ||
| 1233 | controlled with the new user option `ielm-prompt-read-only', which | ||
| 1234 | overrides `comint-prompt-read-only'. | ||
| 1235 | |||
| 1236 | The new commands `comint-kill-whole-line' and `comint-kill-region' | ||
| 1237 | support editing comint buffers with read-only prompts. | ||
| 1238 | |||
| 1239 | `comint-kill-whole-line' is like `kill-whole-line', but ignores both | ||
| 1240 | read-only and field properties. Hence, it always kill entire | ||
| 1241 | lines, including any prompts. | ||
| 1242 | |||
| 1243 | `comint-kill-region' is like `kill-region', except that it ignores | ||
| 1244 | read-only properties, if it is safe to do so. This means that if any | ||
| 1245 | part of a prompt is deleted, then the entire prompt must be deleted | ||
| 1246 | and that all prompts must stay at the beginning of a line. If this is | ||
| 1247 | not the case, then `comint-kill-region' behaves just like | ||
| 1248 | `kill-region' if read-only properties are involved: it copies the text | ||
| 1249 | to the kill-ring, but does not delete it. | ||
| 1250 | |||
| 1251 | *** The new command `comint-insert-previous-argument' in comint-derived | ||
| 1252 | modes (shell-mode, etc.) inserts arguments from previous command lines, | ||
| 1253 | like bash's `ESC .' binding. It is bound by default to `C-c .', but | ||
| 1254 | otherwise behaves quite similarly to the bash version. | ||
| 1255 | |||
| 1256 | *** `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' has been renamed | ||
| 1257 | `comint-use-prompt-regexp'. The old name has been kept as an alias, | ||
| 1258 | but declared obsolete. | ||
| 1259 | |||
| 1260 | ** M-x Compile changes: | ||
| 1261 | |||
| 1262 | *** M-x compile has become more robust and reliable | ||
| 1263 | |||
| 1264 | Quite a few more kinds of messages are recognized. Messages that are | ||
| 1265 | recognized as warnings or informational come in orange or green, instead of | ||
| 1266 | red. Informational messages are by default skipped with `next-error' | ||
| 1267 | (controlled by `compilation-skip-threshold'). | ||
| 1268 | |||
| 1269 | Location data is collected on the fly as the *compilation* buffer changes. | ||
| 1270 | This means you could modify messages to make them point to different files. | ||
| 1271 | This also means you can not go to locations of messages you may have deleted. | ||
| 1272 | |||
| 1273 | The variable `compilation-error-regexp-alist' has now become customizable. If | ||
| 1274 | you had added your own regexps to this, you'll probably need to include a | ||
| 1275 | leading `^', otherwise they'll match anywhere on a line. There is now also a | ||
| 1276 | `compilation-mode-font-lock-keywords' and it nicely handles all the checks | ||
| 1277 | that configure outputs and -o options so you see at a glance where you are. | ||
| 1278 | |||
| 1279 | The new file etc/compilation.txt gives examples of each type of message. | ||
| 1280 | |||
| 1281 | *** New user option `compilation-environment'. | ||
| 1282 | This option allows you to specify environment variables for inferior | ||
| 1283 | compilation processes without affecting the environment that all | ||
| 1284 | subprocesses inherit. | ||
| 1285 | |||
| 1286 | *** New user option `compilation-disable-input'. | ||
| 1287 | If this is non-nil, send end-of-file as compilation process input. | ||
| 1288 | |||
| 1289 | *** New options `next-error-highlight' and `next-error-highlight-no-select' | ||
| 1290 | specify the method of highlighting of the corresponding source line | ||
| 1291 | in new face `next-error'. | ||
| 1292 | |||
| 1293 | *** A new minor mode `next-error-follow-minor-mode' can be used in | ||
| 1294 | compilation-mode, grep-mode, occur-mode, and diff-mode (i.e. all the | ||
| 1295 | modes that can use `next-error'). In this mode, cursor motion in the | ||
| 1296 | buffer causes automatic display in another window of the corresponding | ||
| 1297 | matches, compilation errors, etc. This minor mode can be toggled with | ||
| 1298 | C-c C-f. | ||
| 1299 | |||
| 1300 | *** When the left fringe is displayed, an arrow points to current message in | ||
| 1301 | the compilation buffer. | ||
| 1302 | |||
| 1303 | *** The new variable `compilation-context-lines' controls lines of leading | ||
| 1304 | context before the current message. If nil and the left fringe is displayed, | ||
| 1305 | it doesn't scroll the compilation output window. If there is no left fringe, | ||
| 1306 | no arrow is displayed and a value of nil means display the message at the top | ||
| 1307 | of the window. | ||
| 1308 | |||
| 1309 | ** Occur mode changes: | ||
| 1310 | |||
| 1311 | *** The new command `multi-occur' is just like `occur', except it can | ||
| 1312 | search multiple buffers. There is also a new command | ||
| 1313 | `multi-occur-in-matching-buffers' which allows you to specify the | ||
| 1314 | buffers to search by their filenames or buffer names. Internally, | ||
| 1315 | Occur mode has been rewritten, and now uses font-lock, among other | ||
| 1316 | changes. | ||
| 1317 | |||
| 1318 | *** You can now use next-error (C-x `) and previous-error to advance to | ||
| 1319 | the next/previous matching line found by M-x occur. | ||
| 1320 | |||
| 1321 | *** In the *Occur* buffer, `o' switches to it in another window, and | ||
| 1322 | C-o displays the current line's occurrence in another window without | ||
| 1323 | switching to it. | ||
| 1324 | |||
| 1325 | ** Grep changes: | ||
| 1326 | |||
| 1327 | *** Grep has been decoupled from compilation mode setup. | ||
| 1328 | |||
| 1329 | There's a new separate package grep.el, with its own submenu and | ||
| 1330 | customization group. | ||
| 1331 | |||
| 1332 | *** `grep-find' is now also available under the name `find-grep' where | ||
| 1333 | people knowing `find-grep-dired' would probably expect it. | ||
| 1334 | |||
| 1335 | *** New commands `lgrep' (local grep) and `rgrep' (recursive grep) are | ||
| 1336 | more user-friendly versions of `grep' and `grep-find', which prompt | ||
| 1337 | separately for the regular expression to match, the files to search, | ||
| 1338 | and the base directory for the search. Case sensitivity of the | ||
| 1339 | search is controlled by the current value of `case-fold-search'. | ||
| 1340 | |||
| 1341 | These commands build the shell commands based on the new variables | ||
| 1342 | `grep-template' (lgrep) and `grep-find-template' (rgrep). | ||
| 1343 | |||
| 1344 | The files to search can use aliases defined in `grep-files-aliases'. | ||
| 1345 | |||
| 1346 | Subdirectories listed in `grep-find-ignored-directories' such as those | ||
| 1347 | typically used by various version control systems, like CVS and arch, | ||
| 1348 | are automatically skipped by `rgrep'. | ||
| 1349 | |||
| 1350 | *** The grep commands provide highlighting support. | ||
| 1351 | |||
| 1352 | Hits are fontified in green, and hits in binary files in orange. Grep buffers | ||
| 1353 | can be saved and automatically revisited. | ||
| 1354 | |||
| 1355 | *** New option `grep-highlight-matches' highlights matches in *grep* | ||
| 1356 | buffer. It uses a special feature of some grep programs which accept | ||
| 1357 | --color option to output markers around matches. When going to the next | ||
| 1358 | match with `next-error' the exact match is highlighted in the source | ||
| 1359 | buffer. Otherwise, if `grep-highlight-matches' is nil, the whole | ||
| 1360 | source line is highlighted. | ||
| 1361 | |||
| 1362 | *** New key bindings in grep output window: | ||
| 1363 | SPC and DEL scrolls window up and down. C-n and C-p moves to next and | ||
| 1364 | previous match in the grep window. RET jumps to the source line of | ||
| 1365 | the current match. `n' and `p' shows next and previous match in | ||
| 1366 | other window, but does not switch buffer. `{' and `}' jumps to the | ||
| 1367 | previous or next file in the grep output. TAB also jumps to the next | ||
| 1368 | file. | ||
| 1369 | |||
| 1370 | *** M-x grep now tries to avoid appending `/dev/null' to the command line | ||
| 1371 | by using GNU grep `-H' option instead. M-x grep automatically | ||
| 1372 | detects whether this is possible or not the first time it is invoked. | ||
| 1373 | When `-H' is used, the grep command line supplied by the user is passed | ||
| 1374 | unchanged to the system to execute, which allows more complicated | ||
| 1375 | command lines to be used than was possible before. | ||
| 1376 | |||
| 1377 | *** The new variables `grep-window-height' and `grep-scroll-output' override | ||
| 1378 | the corresponding compilation mode settings, for grep commands only. | ||
| 1379 | |||
| 1380 | ** Cursor display changes: | ||
| 1381 | |||
| 1382 | *** Emacs can produce an underscore-like (horizontal bar) cursor. | ||
| 1383 | The underscore cursor is set by putting `(cursor-type . hbar)' in | ||
| 1384 | default-frame-alist. It supports variable heights, like the `bar' | ||
| 1385 | cursor does. | ||
| 1386 | |||
| 1387 | *** The variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' can now be set to any | ||
| 1388 | of the recognized cursor types. | ||
| 1389 | |||
| 1390 | *** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any) | ||
| 1391 | of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor | ||
| 1392 | appears in. | ||
| 1393 | |||
| 1394 | *** On text terminals, the variable `visible-cursor' controls whether Emacs | ||
| 1395 | uses the "very visible" cursor (the default) or the normal cursor. | ||
| 1396 | |||
| 1397 | *** The X resource cursorBlink can be used to turn off cursor blinking. | ||
| 1398 | |||
| 1399 | *** On X, MS Windows, and Mac OS, the blinking cursor's "off" state is | ||
| 1400 | now controlled by the variable `blink-cursor-alist'. | ||
| 1401 | |||
| 1402 | ** X Windows Support: | ||
| 1403 | |||
| 1404 | *** Emacs now supports drag and drop for X. Dropping a file on a window | ||
| 1405 | opens it, dropping text inserts the text. Dropping a file on a dired | ||
| 1406 | buffer copies or moves the file to that directory. | ||
| 1407 | |||
| 1408 | *** Under X11, it is possible to swap Alt and Meta (and Super and Hyper). | ||
| 1409 | The new variables `x-alt-keysym', `x-hyper-keysym', `x-meta-keysym', | ||
| 1410 | and `x-super-keysym' can be used to choose which keysyms Emacs should | ||
| 1411 | use for the modifiers. For example, the following two lines swap | ||
| 1412 | Meta and Alt: | ||
| 1413 | (setq x-alt-keysym 'meta) | ||
| 1414 | (setq x-meta-keysym 'alt) | ||
| 1415 | |||
| 1416 | *** The X resource useXIM can be used to turn off use of XIM, which can | ||
| 1417 | speed up Emacs with slow networking to the X server. | ||
| 1418 | |||
| 1419 | If the configure option `--without-xim' was used to turn off use of | ||
| 1420 | XIM by default, the X resource useXIM can be used to turn it on. | ||
| 1421 | |||
| 1422 | *** The new variable `x-select-request-type' controls how Emacs | ||
| 1423 | requests X selection. The default value is nil, which means that | ||
| 1424 | Emacs requests X selection with types COMPOUND_TEXT and UTF8_STRING, | ||
| 1425 | and use the more appropriately result. | ||
| 1426 | |||
| 1427 | *** The scrollbar under LessTif or Motif has a smoother drag-scrolling. | ||
| 1428 | On the other hand, the size of the thumb does not represent the actual | ||
| 1429 | amount of text shown any more (only a crude approximation of it). | ||
| 1430 | |||
| 1431 | ** Xterm support: | ||
| 1432 | |||
| 1433 | *** If you enable Xterm Mouse mode, Emacs will respond to mouse clicks | ||
| 1434 | on the mode line, header line and display margin, when run in an xterm. | ||
| 1435 | |||
| 1436 | *** Improved key bindings support when running in an xterm. | ||
| 1437 | When Emacs is running in an xterm more key bindings are available. | ||
| 1438 | The following should work: | ||
| 1439 | {C,S,C-S,A}-{right,left,up,down,prior,next,delete,insert,F1-12}. | ||
| 1440 | These key bindings work on xterm from X.org 6.8 (and later versions), | ||
| 1441 | they might not work on some older versions of xterm, or on some | ||
| 1442 | proprietary versions. | ||
| 1443 | The various keys generated by xterm when the "modifyOtherKeys" | ||
| 1444 | resource is set are also supported. | ||
| 1445 | |||
| 1446 | ** Character terminal color support changes: | ||
| 1447 | |||
| 1448 | *** The new command-line option --color=MODE lets you specify a standard | ||
| 1449 | mode for a tty color support. It is meant to be used on character | ||
| 1450 | terminals whose capabilities are not set correctly in the terminal | ||
| 1451 | database, or with terminal emulators which support colors, but don't | ||
| 1452 | set the TERM environment variable to a name of a color-capable | ||
| 1453 | terminal. "emacs --color" uses the same color commands as GNU `ls' | ||
| 1454 | when invoked with "ls --color", so if your terminal can support colors | ||
| 1455 | in "ls --color", it will support "emacs --color" as well. See the | ||
| 1456 | user manual for the possible values of the MODE parameter. | ||
| 1457 | |||
| 1458 | *** Emacs now supports several character terminals which provide more | ||
| 1459 | than 8 colors. For example, for `xterm', 16-color, 88-color, and | ||
| 1460 | 256-color modes are supported. Emacs automatically notes at startup | ||
| 1461 | the extended number of colors, and defines the appropriate entries for | ||
| 1462 | all of these colors. | ||
| 1463 | |||
| 1464 | *** Emacs now uses the full range of available colors for the default | ||
| 1465 | faces when running on a color terminal, including 16-, 88-, and | ||
| 1466 | 256-color xterms. This means that when you run "emacs -nw" on an | ||
| 1467 | 88-color or 256-color xterm, you will see essentially the same face | ||
| 1468 | colors as on X. | ||
| 1469 | |||
| 1470 | *** There's a new support for colors on `rxvt' terminal emulator. | ||
| 1471 | |||
| 1472 | ** ebnf2ps changes: | ||
| 1473 | |||
| 1474 | *** New option `ebnf-arrow-extra-width' which specify extra width for arrow | ||
| 1475 | shape drawing. | ||
| 1476 | The extra width is used to avoid that the arrowhead and the terminal border | ||
| 1477 | overlap. It depends on `ebnf-arrow-shape' and `ebnf-line-width'. | ||
| 1478 | |||
| 1479 | *** New option `ebnf-arrow-scale' which specify the arrow scale. | ||
| 1480 | Values lower than 1.0, shrink the arrow. | ||
| 1481 | Values greater than 1.0, expand the arrow. | ||
| 1482 | |||
| 1483 | * New Modes and Packages in Emacs 22.1 | ||
| 1484 | |||
| 1485 | ** CUA mode is now part of the Emacs distribution. | ||
| 1486 | |||
| 1487 | The new cua package provides CUA-like keybindings using C-x for | ||
| 1488 | cut (kill), C-c for copy, C-v for paste (yank), and C-z for undo. | ||
| 1489 | With cua, the region can be set and extended using shifted movement | ||
| 1490 | keys (like pc-selection-mode) and typed text replaces the active | ||
| 1491 | region (like delete-selection-mode). Do not enable these modes with | ||
| 1492 | cua-mode. Customize the variable `cua-mode' to enable cua. | ||
| 1493 | |||
| 1494 | The cua-selection-mode enables the CUA keybindings for the region but | ||
| 1495 | does not change the bindings for C-z/C-x/C-c/C-v. It can be used as a | ||
| 1496 | replacement for pc-selection-mode. | ||
| 1497 | |||
| 1498 | In addition, cua provides unified rectangle support with visible | ||
| 1499 | rectangle highlighting: Use C-return to start a rectangle, extend it | ||
| 1500 | using the movement commands (or mouse-3), and cut or copy it using C-x | ||
| 1501 | or C-c (using C-w and M-w also works). | ||
| 1502 | |||
| 1503 | Use M-o and M-c to `open' or `close' the rectangle, use M-b or M-f, to | ||
| 1504 | fill it with blanks or another character, use M-u or M-l to upcase or | ||
| 1505 | downcase the rectangle, use M-i to increment the numbers in the | ||
| 1506 | rectangle, use M-n to fill the rectangle with a numeric sequence (such | ||
| 1507 | as 10 20 30...), use M-r to replace a regexp in the rectangle, and use | ||
| 1508 | M-' or M-/ to restrict command on the rectangle to a subset of the | ||
| 1509 | rows. See the commentary in cua-base.el for more rectangle commands. | ||
| 1510 | |||
| 1511 | Cua also provides unified support for registers: Use a numeric | ||
| 1512 | prefix argument between 0 and 9, i.e. M-0 .. M-9, for C-x, C-c, and | ||
| 1513 | C-v to cut or copy into register 0-9, or paste from register 0-9. | ||
| 1514 | |||
| 1515 | The last text deleted (not killed) is automatically stored in | ||
| 1516 | register 0. This includes text deleted by typing text. | ||
| 1517 | |||
| 1518 | Finally, cua provides a global mark which is set using S-C-space. | ||
| 1519 | When the global mark is active, any text which is cut or copied is | ||
| 1520 | automatically inserted at the global mark position. See the | ||
| 1521 | commentary in cua-base.el for more global mark related commands. | ||
| 1522 | |||
| 1523 | The features of cua also works with the standard Emacs bindings for | ||
| 1524 | kill, copy, yank, and undo. If you want to use cua mode, but don't | ||
| 1525 | want the C-x, C-c, C-v, and C-z bindings, you can customize the | ||
| 1526 | `cua-enable-cua-keys' variable. | ||
| 1527 | |||
| 1528 | Note: This version of cua mode is not backwards compatible with older | ||
| 1529 | versions of cua.el and cua-mode.el. To ensure proper operation, you | ||
| 1530 | must remove older versions of cua.el or cua-mode.el as well as the | ||
| 1531 | loading and customization of those packages from the .emacs file. | ||
| 1532 | |||
| 1533 | ** Tramp is now part of the distribution. | ||
| 1534 | |||
| 1535 | This package is similar to Ange-FTP: it allows you to edit remote | ||
| 1536 | files. But whereas Ange-FTP uses FTP to access the remote host, | ||
| 1537 | Tramp uses a shell connection. The shell connection is always used | ||
| 1538 | for filename completion and directory listings and suchlike, but for | ||
| 1539 | the actual file transfer, you can choose between the so-called | ||
| 1540 | `inline' methods (which transfer the files through the shell | ||
| 1541 | connection using base64 or uu encoding) and the `out-of-band' methods | ||
| 1542 | (which invoke an external copying program such as `rcp' or `scp' or | ||
| 1543 | `rsync' to do the copying). | ||
| 1544 | |||
| 1545 | Shell connections can be acquired via `rsh', `ssh', `telnet' and also | ||
| 1546 | `su' and `sudo'. Ange-FTP is still supported via the `ftp' method. | ||
| 1547 | |||
| 1548 | If you want to disable Tramp you should set | ||
| 1549 | |||
| 1550 | (setq tramp-default-method "ftp") | ||
| 1551 | |||
| 1552 | Removing Tramp, and re-enabling Ange-FTP, can be achieved by M-x | ||
| 1553 | tramp-unload-tramp. | ||
| 1554 | |||
| 1555 | ** The image-dired.el package allows you to easily view, tag and in | ||
| 1556 | other ways manipulate image files and their thumbnails, using dired as | ||
| 1557 | the main interface. Image-Dired provides functionality to generate | ||
| 1558 | simple image galleries. | ||
| 1559 | |||
| 1560 | ** Image files are normally visited in Image mode, which lets you toggle | ||
| 1561 | between viewing the image and viewing the text using C-c C-c. | ||
| 1562 | |||
| 1563 | ** The new python.el package is used to edit Python and Jython programs. | ||
| 1564 | |||
| 1565 | ** The URL package (which had been part of W3) is now part of Emacs. | ||
| 1566 | |||
| 1567 | ** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution. | ||
| 1568 | |||
| 1569 | Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in | ||
| 1570 | Emacs Lisp. The prefix for Calc has been changed to `C-x *' and Calc | ||
| 1571 | can be started with `C-x * *'. The Calc manual is separate from the | ||
| 1572 | Emacs manual; within Emacs, type "C-h i m calc RET" to read the | ||
| 1573 | manual. A reference card is available in `etc/calccard.tex' and | ||
| 1574 | `etc/calccard.ps'. | ||
| 1575 | |||
| 1576 | ** Org mode is now part of the Emacs distribution | ||
| 1577 | |||
| 1578 | Org mode is a mode for keeping notes, maintaining ToDo lists, and | ||
| 1579 | doing project planning with a fast and effective plain-text system. | ||
| 1580 | It also contains a plain-text table editor with spreadsheet-like | ||
| 1581 | capabilities. | ||
| 1582 | |||
| 1583 | The Org mode table editor can be integrated into any major mode by | ||
| 1584 | activating the minor Orgtbl-mode. | ||
| 1585 | |||
| 1586 | The documentation for org-mode is in a separate manual; within Emacs, | ||
| 1587 | type "C-h i m org RET" to read that manual. A reference card is | ||
| 1588 | available in `etc/orgcard.tex' and `etc/orgcard.ps'. | ||
| 1589 | |||
| 1590 | ** ERC is now part of the Emacs distribution. | ||
| 1591 | |||
| 1592 | ERC is a powerful, modular, and extensible IRC client for Emacs. | ||
| 1593 | |||
| 1594 | To see what modules are available, type | ||
| 1595 | M-x customize-option erc-modules RET. | ||
| 1596 | |||
| 1597 | To start an IRC session with ERC, type M-x erc, and follow the prompts | ||
| 1598 | for server, port, and nick. | ||
| 1599 | |||
| 1600 | ** Rcirc is now part of the Emacs distribution. | ||
| 1601 | |||
| 1602 | Rcirc is an Internet relay chat (IRC) client. It supports | ||
| 1603 | simultaneous connections to multiple IRC servers. Each discussion | ||
| 1604 | takes place in its own buffer. For each connection you can join | ||
| 1605 | several channels (many-to-many) and participate in private | ||
| 1606 | (one-to-one) chats. Both channel and private chats are contained in | ||
| 1607 | separate buffers. | ||
| 1608 | |||
| 1609 | To start an IRC session using the default parameters, type M-x irc. | ||
| 1610 | If you type C-u M-x irc, it prompts you for the server, nick, port and | ||
| 1611 | startup channel parameters before connecting. | ||
| 1612 | |||
| 1613 | ** The new package ibuffer provides a powerful, completely | ||
| 1614 | customizable replacement for buff-menu.el. | ||
| 1615 | |||
| 1616 | ** Newsticker is now part of the Emacs distribution. | ||
| 1617 | |||
| 1618 | Newsticker asynchronously retrieves headlines (RSS) from a list of news | ||
| 1619 | sites, prepares these headlines for reading, and allows for loading the | ||
| 1620 | corresponding articles in a web browser. Its documentation is in a | ||
| 1621 | separate manual. | ||
| 1622 | |||
| 1623 | ** The wdired.el package allows you to use normal editing commands on Dired | ||
| 1624 | buffers to change filenames, permissions, etc... | ||
| 1625 | |||
| 1626 | ** Ido mode is now part of the Emacs distribution. | ||
| 1627 | |||
| 1628 | The ido (interactively do) package is an extension of the iswitchb | ||
| 1629 | package to do interactive opening of files and directories in addition | ||
| 1630 | to interactive buffer switching. Ido is a superset of iswitchb (with | ||
| 1631 | a few exceptions), so don't enable both packages. | ||
| 1632 | |||
| 1633 | ** The new global minor mode `file-name-shadow-mode' modifies the way | ||
| 1634 | filenames being entered by the user in the minibuffer are displayed, so | ||
| 1635 | that it's clear when part of the entered filename will be ignored due to | ||
| 1636 | Emacs' filename parsing rules. The ignored portion can be made dim, | ||
| 1637 | invisible, or otherwise less visually noticeable. The display method can | ||
| 1638 | be displayed by customizing the variable `file-name-shadow-properties'. | ||
| 1639 | |||
| 1640 | ** Emacs' keyboard macro facilities have been enhanced by the new | ||
| 1641 | kmacro package. | ||
| 1642 | |||
| 1643 | Keyboard macros are now defined and executed via the F3 and F4 keys: | ||
| 1644 | F3 starts a macro, F4 ends the macro, and pressing F4 again executes | ||
| 1645 | the last macro. While defining the macro, F3 inserts a counter value | ||
| 1646 | which automatically increments every time the macro is executed. | ||
| 1647 | |||
| 1648 | There is now a keyboard macro ring which stores the most recently | ||
| 1649 | defined macros. | ||
| 1650 | |||
| 1651 | The C-x C-k sequence is now a prefix for the kmacro keymap which | ||
| 1652 | defines bindings for moving through the keyboard macro ring, | ||
| 1653 | C-x C-k C-p and C-x C-k C-n, editing the last macro C-x C-k C-e, | ||
| 1654 | manipulating the macro counter and format via C-x C-k C-c, | ||
| 1655 | C-x C-k C-a, and C-x C-k C-f. See the commentary in kmacro.el | ||
| 1656 | for more commands. | ||
| 1657 | |||
| 1658 | The original macro bindings C-x (, C-x ), and C-x e are still | ||
| 1659 | available, but they now interface to the keyboard macro ring too. | ||
| 1660 | |||
| 1661 | The C-x e command now automatically terminates the current macro | ||
| 1662 | before calling it, if used while defining a macro. | ||
| 1663 | |||
| 1664 | In addition, when ending or calling a macro with C-x e, the macro can | ||
| 1665 | be repeated immediately by typing just the `e'. You can customize | ||
| 1666 | this behavior via the variables kmacro-call-repeat-key and | ||
| 1667 | kmacro-call-repeat-with-arg. | ||
| 1668 | |||
| 1669 | Keyboard macros can now be debugged and edited interactively. | ||
| 1670 | C-x C-k SPC steps through the last keyboard macro one key sequence | ||
| 1671 | at a time, prompting for the actions to take. | ||
| 1672 | |||
| 1673 | ** The new keypad setup package provides several common bindings for | ||
| 1674 | the numeric keypad which is available on most keyboards. The numeric | ||
| 1675 | keypad typically has the digits 0 to 9, a decimal point, keys marked | ||
| 1676 | +, -, /, and *, an Enter key, and a NumLock toggle key. The keypad | ||
| 1677 | package only controls the use of the digit and decimal keys. | ||
| 1678 | |||
| 1679 | By customizing the variables `keypad-setup', `keypad-shifted-setup', | ||
| 1680 | `keypad-numlock-setup', and `keypad-numlock-shifted-setup', or by | ||
| 1681 | using the function `keypad-setup', you can rebind all digit keys and | ||
| 1682 | the decimal key of the keypad in one step for each of the four | ||
| 1683 | possible combinations of the Shift key state (not pressed/pressed) and | ||
| 1684 | the NumLock toggle state (off/on). | ||
| 1685 | |||
| 1686 | The choices for the keypad keys in each of the above states are: | ||
| 1687 | `Plain numeric keypad' where the keys generates plain digits, | ||
| 1688 | `Numeric keypad with decimal key' where the character produced by the | ||
| 1689 | decimal key can be customized individually (for internationalization), | ||
| 1690 | `Numeric Prefix Arg' where the keypad keys produce numeric prefix args | ||
| 1691 | for Emacs editing commands, `Cursor keys' and `Shifted Cursor keys' | ||
| 1692 | where the keys work like (shifted) arrow keys, home/end, etc., and | ||
| 1693 | `Unspecified/User-defined' where the keypad keys (kp-0, kp-1, etc.) | ||
| 1694 | are left unspecified and can be bound individually through the global | ||
| 1695 | or local keymaps. | ||
| 1696 | |||
| 1697 | ** The printing package is now part of the Emacs distribution. | ||
| 1698 | |||
| 1699 | If you enable the printing package by including (require 'printing) in | ||
| 1700 | the .emacs file, the normal Print item on the File menu is replaced | ||
| 1701 | with a Print sub-menu which allows you to preview output through | ||
| 1702 | ghostview, use ghostscript to print (if you don't have a PostScript | ||
| 1703 | printer) or send directly to printer a PostScript code generated by | ||
| 1704 | `ps-print' package. Use M-x pr-help for more information. | ||
| 1705 | |||
| 1706 | ** The new package longlines.el provides a minor mode for editing text | ||
| 1707 | files composed of long lines, based on the `use-hard-newlines' | ||
| 1708 | mechanism. The long lines are broken up by inserting soft newlines, | ||
| 1709 | which are automatically removed when saving the file to disk or | ||
| 1710 | copying into the kill ring, clipboard, etc. By default, Longlines | ||
| 1711 | mode inserts soft newlines automatically during editing, a behavior | ||
| 1712 | referred to as "soft word wrap" in other text editors. This is | ||
| 1713 | similar to Refill mode, but more reliable. To turn the word wrap | ||
| 1714 | feature off, set `longlines-auto-wrap' to nil. | ||
| 1715 | |||
| 1716 | ** SES mode (ses-mode) is a new major mode for creating and editing | ||
| 1717 | spreadsheet files. Besides the usual Emacs features (intuitive command | ||
| 1718 | letters, undo, cell formulas in Lisp, plaintext files, etc.) it also offers | ||
| 1719 | viral immunity and import/export of tab-separated values. | ||
| 1720 | |||
| 1721 | ** The new package table.el implements editable, WYSIWYG, embedded | ||
| 1722 | `text tables' in Emacs buffers. It simulates the effect of putting | ||
| 1723 | these tables in a special major mode. The package emulates WYSIWYG | ||
| 1724 | table editing available in modern word processors. The package also | ||
| 1725 | can generate a table source in typesetting and markup languages such | ||
| 1726 | as latex and html from the visually laid out text table. | ||
| 1727 | |||
| 1728 | ** Filesets are collections of files. You can define a fileset in | ||
| 1729 | various ways, such as based on a directory tree or based on | ||
| 1730 | program files that include other program files. | ||
| 1731 | |||
| 1732 | Once you have defined a fileset, you can perform various operations on | ||
| 1733 | all the files in it, such as visiting them or searching and replacing | ||
| 1734 | in them. | ||
| 1735 | |||
| 1736 | ** The minor mode Reveal mode makes text visible on the fly as you | ||
| 1737 | move your cursor into hidden regions of the buffer. | ||
| 1738 | It should work with any package that uses overlays to hide parts | ||
| 1739 | of a buffer, such as outline-minor-mode, hs-minor-mode, hide-ifdef-mode, ... | ||
| 1740 | |||
| 1741 | There is also Global Reveal mode which affects all buffers. | ||
| 1742 | |||
| 1743 | ** New minor mode, Visible mode, toggles invisibility in the current buffer. | ||
| 1744 | When enabled, it makes all invisible text visible. When disabled, it | ||
| 1745 | restores the previous value of `buffer-invisibility-spec'. | ||
| 1746 | |||
| 1747 | ** The new package flymake.el does on-the-fly syntax checking of program | ||
| 1748 | source files. See the Flymake's Info manual for more details. | ||
| 1749 | |||
| 1750 | ** savehist saves minibuffer histories between sessions. | ||
| 1751 | To use this feature, turn on savehist-mode in your `.emacs' file. | ||
| 1752 | |||
| 1753 | ** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an | ||
| 1754 | "active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually | ||
| 1755 | change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list' | ||
| 1756 | settings. | ||
| 1757 | |||
| 1758 | ** The file t-mouse.el is now part of Emacs and provides access to mouse | ||
| 1759 | events from the console. It still requires gpm to work but has been updated | ||
| 1760 | for Emacs 22. In particular, the mode-line is now position sensitive. | ||
| 1761 | |||
| 1762 | ** The new package scroll-lock.el provides the Scroll Lock minor mode | ||
| 1763 | for pager-like scrolling. Keys which normally move point by line or | ||
| 1764 | paragraph will scroll the buffer by the respective amount of lines | ||
| 1765 | instead and point will be kept vertically fixed relative to window | ||
| 1766 | boundaries during scrolling. | ||
| 1767 | |||
| 1768 | ** The new global minor mode `size-indication-mode' (off by default) | ||
| 1769 | shows the size of accessible part of the buffer on the mode line. | ||
| 1770 | |||
| 1771 | ** The new package conf-mode.el handles thousands of configuration files, with | ||
| 1772 | varying syntaxes for comments (;, #, //, /* */ or !), assignment (var = value, | ||
| 1773 | var : value, var value or keyword var value) and sections ([section] or | ||
| 1774 | section { }). Many files under /etc/, or with suffixes like .cf through | ||
| 1775 | .config, .properties (Java), .desktop (KDE/Gnome), .ini and many others are | ||
| 1776 | recognized. | ||
| 1777 | |||
| 1778 | ** GDB-Script-mode is used for files like .gdbinit. | ||
| 1779 | |||
| 1780 | ** The new package dns-mode.el adds syntax highlighting of DNS master files. | ||
| 1781 | It is a modern replacement for zone-mode.el, which is now obsolete. | ||
| 1782 | |||
| 1783 | ** `cfengine-mode' is a major mode for editing GNU Cfengine | ||
| 1784 | configuration files. | ||
| 1785 | |||
| 1786 | ** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el. | ||
| 1787 | This was actually done in Emacs-21.1, and was not documented. | ||
| 1788 | |||
| 1789 | * Changes in Specialized Modes and Packages in Emacs 22.1: | ||
| 1790 | |||
| 1791 | ** Changes in Dired | ||
| 1792 | |||
| 1793 | *** Bindings for Image-Dired added. | ||
| 1794 | Several new keybindings, all starting with the C-t prefix, have been | ||
| 1795 | added to Dired. They are all bound to commands in Image-Dired. As a | ||
| 1796 | starting point, mark some image files in a dired buffer and do C-t d | ||
| 1797 | to display thumbnails of them in a separate buffer. | ||
| 1798 | |||
| 1799 | ** Info mode changes | ||
| 1800 | |||
| 1801 | *** Images in Info pages are supported. | ||
| 1802 | |||
| 1803 | Info pages show embedded images, in Emacs frames with image support. | ||
| 1804 | Info documentation that includes images, processed with makeinfo | ||
| 1805 | version 4.7 or newer, compiles to Info pages with embedded images. | ||
| 1806 | |||
| 1807 | *** `Info-index' offers completion. | ||
| 1808 | |||
| 1809 | *** http and ftp links in Info are now operational: they look like cross | ||
| 1810 | references and following them calls `browse-url'. | ||
| 1811 | |||
| 1812 | *** isearch in Info uses Info-search and searches through multiple nodes. | ||
| 1813 | |||
| 1814 | Before leaving the initial Info node isearch fails once with the error | ||
| 1815 | message [initial node], and with subsequent C-s/C-r continues through | ||
| 1816 | other nodes. When isearch fails for the rest of the manual, it wraps | ||
| 1817 | around the whole manual to the top/final node. The user option | ||
| 1818 | `Info-isearch-search' controls whether to use Info-search for isearch, | ||
| 1819 | or the default isearch search function that wraps around the current | ||
| 1820 | Info node. | ||
| 1821 | |||
| 1822 | *** New search commands: `Info-search-case-sensitively' (bound to S), | ||
| 1823 | `Info-search-backward', and `Info-search-next' which repeats the last | ||
| 1824 | search without prompting for a new search string. | ||
| 1825 | |||
| 1826 | *** New command `info-apropos' searches the indices of the known | ||
| 1827 | Info files on your system for a string, and builds a menu of the | ||
| 1828 | possible matches. | ||
| 1829 | |||
| 1830 | *** New command `Info-history-forward' (bound to r and new toolbar icon) | ||
| 1831 | moves forward in history to the node you returned from after using | ||
| 1832 | `Info-history-back' (renamed from `Info-last'). | ||
| 1833 | |||
| 1834 | *** New command `Info-history' (bound to L) displays a menu of visited nodes. | ||
| 1835 | |||
| 1836 | *** New command `Info-toc' (bound to T) creates a node with table of contents | ||
| 1837 | from the tree structure of menus of the current Info file. | ||
| 1838 | |||
| 1839 | *** New command `Info-copy-current-node-name' (bound to w) copies | ||
| 1840 | the current Info node name into the kill ring. With a zero prefix | ||
| 1841 | arg, puts the node name inside the `info' function call. | ||
| 1842 | |||
| 1843 | *** New face `info-xref-visited' distinguishes visited nodes from unvisited | ||
| 1844 | and a new option `Info-fontify-visited-nodes' to control this. | ||
| 1845 | |||
| 1846 | *** A numeric prefix argument of `info' selects an Info buffer | ||
| 1847 | with the number appended to the `*info*' buffer name (e.g. "*info*<2>"). | ||
| 1848 | |||
| 1849 | *** Info now hides node names in menus and cross references by default. | ||
| 1850 | |||
| 1851 | If you prefer the old behavior, you can set the new user option | ||
| 1852 | `Info-hide-note-references' to nil. | ||
| 1853 | |||
| 1854 | *** The default value for `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' is now nil. | ||
| 1855 | |||
| 1856 | ** Emacs server changes | ||
| 1857 | |||
| 1858 | *** You can have several Emacs servers on the same machine. | ||
| 1859 | |||
| 1860 | % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "foo")' -f server-start & | ||
| 1861 | % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "bar")' -f server-start & | ||
| 1862 | % emacsclient -s foo file1 | ||
| 1863 | % emacsclient -s bar file2 | ||
| 1864 | |||
| 1865 | *** The `emacsclient' command understands the options `--eval' and | ||
| 1866 | `--display' which tell Emacs respectively to evaluate the given Lisp | ||
| 1867 | expression and to use the given display when visiting files. | ||
| 1868 | |||
| 1869 | *** User option `server-mode' can be used to start a server process. | ||
| 1870 | |||
| 1871 | ** Locate changes | ||
| 1872 | |||
| 1873 | *** By default, reverting the *Locate* buffer now just runs the last | ||
| 1874 | `locate' command back over again without offering to update the locate | ||
| 1875 | database (which normally only works if you have root privileges). If | ||
| 1876 | you prefer the old behavior, set the new customizable option | ||
| 1877 | `locate-update-when-revert' to t. | ||
| 1878 | |||
| 1879 | ** Desktop package | ||
| 1880 | |||
| 1881 | *** Desktop saving is now a minor mode, `desktop-save-mode'. | ||
| 1882 | |||
| 1883 | *** The variable `desktop-enable' is obsolete. | ||
| 1884 | |||
| 1885 | Customize `desktop-save-mode' to enable desktop saving. | ||
| 1886 | |||
| 1887 | *** Buffers are saved in the desktop file in the same order as that in the | ||
| 1888 | buffer list. | ||
| 1889 | |||
| 1890 | *** The desktop package can be customized to restore only some buffers | ||
| 1891 | immediately, remaining buffers are restored lazily (when Emacs is | ||
| 1892 | idle). | ||
| 1893 | |||
| 1894 | *** New command line option --no-desktop | ||
| 1895 | |||
| 1896 | *** New commands: | ||
| 1897 | - desktop-revert reverts to the last loaded desktop. | ||
| 1898 | - desktop-change-dir kills current desktop and loads a new. | ||
| 1899 | - desktop-save-in-desktop-dir saves desktop in the directory from which | ||
| 1900 | it was loaded. | ||
| 1901 | - desktop-lazy-complete runs the desktop load to completion. | ||
| 1902 | - desktop-lazy-abort aborts lazy loading of the desktop. | ||
| 1903 | |||
| 1904 | *** New customizable variables: | ||
| 1905 | - desktop-save. Determines whether the desktop should be saved when it is | ||
| 1906 | killed. | ||
| 1907 | - desktop-file-name-format. Format in which desktop file names should be saved. | ||
| 1908 | - desktop-path. List of directories in which to lookup the desktop file. | ||
| 1909 | - desktop-locals-to-save. List of local variables to save. | ||
| 1910 | - desktop-globals-to-clear. List of global variables that `desktop-clear' will clear. | ||
| 1911 | - desktop-clear-preserve-buffers-regexp. Regexp identifying buffers that `desktop-clear' | ||
| 1912 | should not delete. | ||
| 1913 | - desktop-restore-eager. Number of buffers to restore immediately. Remaining buffers are | ||
| 1914 | restored lazily (when Emacs is idle). | ||
| 1915 | - desktop-lazy-verbose. Verbose reporting of lazily created buffers. | ||
| 1916 | - desktop-lazy-idle-delay. Idle delay before starting to create buffers. | ||
| 1917 | |||
| 1918 | *** New hooks: | ||
| 1919 | - desktop-after-read-hook run after a desktop is loaded. | ||
| 1920 | - desktop-no-desktop-file-hook run when no desktop file is found. | ||
| 1921 | |||
| 1922 | ** Recentf changes | ||
| 1923 | |||
| 1924 | The recent file list is now automatically cleaned up when recentf mode is | ||
| 1925 | enabled. The new option `recentf-auto-cleanup' controls when to do | ||
| 1926 | automatic cleanup. | ||
| 1927 | |||
| 1928 | The ten most recent files can be quickly opened by using the shortcut | ||
| 1929 | keys 1 to 9, and 0, when the recent list is displayed in a buffer via | ||
| 1930 | the `recentf-open-files', or `recentf-open-more-files' commands. | ||
| 1931 | |||
| 1932 | The `recentf-keep' option replaces `recentf-keep-non-readable-files-p' | ||
| 1933 | and provides a more general mechanism to customize which file names to | ||
| 1934 | keep in the recent list. | ||
| 1935 | |||
| 1936 | With the more advanced option `recentf-filename-handlers', you can | ||
| 1937 | specify functions that successively transform recent file names. For | ||
| 1938 | example, if set to `file-truename' plus `abbreviate-file-name', the | ||
| 1939 | same file will not be in the recent list with different symbolic | ||
| 1940 | links, and the file name will be abbreviated. | ||
| 1941 | |||
| 1942 | To follow naming convention, `recentf-menu-append-commands-flag' | ||
| 1943 | replaces the misnamed option `recentf-menu-append-commands-p'. The | ||
| 1944 | old name remains available as alias, but has been marked obsolete. | ||
| 1945 | |||
| 1946 | ** Auto-Revert changes | ||
| 1947 | |||
| 1948 | *** You can now use Auto Revert mode to `tail' a file. | ||
| 1949 | |||
| 1950 | If point is at the end of a file buffer before reverting, Auto Revert | ||
| 1951 | mode keeps it at the end after reverting. Similarly if point is | ||
| 1952 | displayed at the end of a file buffer in any window, it stays at | ||
| 1953 | the end of the buffer in that window. This allows to tail a file: | ||
| 1954 | just put point at the end of the buffer and it stays there. This | ||
| 1955 | rule applies to file buffers. For non-file buffers, the behavior can | ||
| 1956 | be mode dependent. | ||
| 1957 | |||
| 1958 | If you are sure that the file will only change by growing at the end, | ||
| 1959 | then you can tail the file more efficiently by using the new minor | ||
| 1960 | mode Auto Revert Tail mode. The function `auto-revert-tail-mode' | ||
| 1961 | toggles this mode. | ||
| 1962 | |||
| 1963 | *** Auto Revert mode is now more careful to avoid excessive reverts and | ||
| 1964 | other potential problems when deciding which non-file buffers to | ||
| 1965 | revert. This matters especially if Global Auto Revert mode is enabled | ||
| 1966 | and `global-auto-revert-non-file-buffers' is non-nil. Auto Revert | ||
| 1967 | mode only reverts a non-file buffer if the buffer has a non-nil | ||
| 1968 | `revert-buffer-function' and a non-nil `buffer-stale-function', which | ||
| 1969 | decides whether the buffer should be reverted. Currently, this means | ||
| 1970 | that auto reverting works for Dired buffers (although this may not | ||
| 1971 | work properly on all operating systems) and for the Buffer Menu. | ||
| 1972 | |||
| 1973 | *** If the new user option `auto-revert-check-vc-info' is non-nil, Auto | ||
| 1974 | Revert mode reliably updates version control info (such as the version | ||
| 1975 | control number in the mode line), in all version controlled buffers in | ||
| 1976 | which it is active. If the option is nil, the default, then this info | ||
| 1977 | only gets updated whenever the buffer gets reverted. | ||
| 1978 | |||
| 1979 | ** Changes in Shell Mode | ||
| 1980 | |||
| 1981 | *** Shell output normally scrolls so that the input line is at the | ||
| 1982 | bottom of the window -- thus showing the maximum possible text. (This | ||
| 1983 | is similar to the way sequential output to a terminal works.) | ||
| 1984 | |||
| 1985 | ** Changes in Hi Lock | ||
| 1986 | |||
| 1987 | *** hi-lock-mode now only affects a single buffer, and a new function | ||
| 1988 | `global-hi-lock-mode' enables Hi Lock in all buffers. By default, if | ||
| 1989 | hi-lock-mode is used in what appears to be the initialization file, a | ||
| 1990 | warning message suggests to use global-hi-lock-mode instead. However, | ||
| 1991 | if the new variable `hi-lock-archaic-interface-deduce' is non-nil, | ||
| 1992 | using hi-lock-mode in an initialization file will turn on Hi Lock in all | ||
| 1993 | buffers and no warning will be issued (for compatibility with the | ||
| 1994 | behavior in older versions of Emacs). | ||
| 1995 | |||
| 1996 | ** Changes in Allout | ||
| 1997 | |||
| 1998 | *** Topic cryptography added, enabling easy gpg topic encryption and | ||
| 1999 | decryption. Per-topic basis enables interspersing encrypted-text and | ||
| 2000 | clear-text within a single file to your heart's content, using symmetric | ||
| 2001 | and/or public key modes. Time-limited key caching, user-provided | ||
| 2002 | symmetric key hinting and consistency verification, auto-encryption of | ||
| 2003 | pending topics on save, and more, make it easy to use encryption in | ||
| 2004 | powerful ways. Encryption behavior customization is collected in the | ||
| 2005 | allout-encryption customization group. | ||
| 2006 | |||
| 2007 | *** Default command prefix was changed to "\C-c " (control-c space), to | ||
| 2008 | avoid intruding on user's keybinding space. Customize the | ||
| 2009 | `allout-command-prefix' variable to your preference. | ||
| 2010 | |||
| 2011 | *** Some previously rough topic-header format edge cases are reconciled. | ||
| 2012 | Level 1 topics use the mode's comment format, and lines starting with the | ||
| 2013 | asterisk - for instance, the comment close of some languages (eg, c's "*/" | ||
| 2014 | or mathematica's "*)") - at the beginning of line are no longer are | ||
| 2015 | interpreted as level 1 topics in those modes. | ||
| 2016 | |||
| 2017 | *** Many or most commonly occurring "accidental" topics are disqualified. | ||
| 2018 | Text in item bodies that looks like a low-depth topic is no longer mistaken | ||
| 2019 | for one unless its first offspring (or that of its next sibling with | ||
| 2020 | offspring) is only one level deeper. | ||
| 2021 | |||
| 2022 | For example, pasting some text with a bunch of leading asterisks into a | ||
| 2023 | topic that's followed by a level 3 or deeper topic will not cause the | ||
| 2024 | pasted text to be mistaken for outline structure. | ||
| 2025 | |||
| 2026 | The same constraint is applied to any level 2 or 3 topics. | ||
| 2027 | |||
| 2028 | This settles an old issue where typed or pasted text needed to be carefully | ||
| 2029 | reviewed, and sometimes doctored, to avoid accidentally disrupting the | ||
| 2030 | outline structure. Now that should be generally unnecessary, as the most | ||
| 2031 | prone-to-occur accidents are disqualified. | ||
| 2032 | |||
| 2033 | *** Allout now refuses to create "containment discontinuities", where a | ||
| 2034 | topic is shifted deeper than the offspring-depth of its container. On the | ||
| 2035 | other hand, allout now operates gracefully with existing containment | ||
| 2036 | discontinuities, revealing excessively contained topics rather than either | ||
| 2037 | leaving them hidden or raising an error. | ||
| 2038 | |||
| 2039 | *** Navigation within an item is easier. Repeated beginning-of-line and | ||
| 2040 | end-of-line key commands (usually, ^A and ^E) cycle through the | ||
| 2041 | beginning/end-of-line and then beginning/end of topic, etc. See new | ||
| 2042 | customization vars `allout-beginning-of-line-cycles' and | ||
| 2043 | `allout-end-of-line-cycles'. | ||
| 2044 | |||
| 2045 | *** New or revised allout-mode activity hooks enable creation of | ||
| 2046 | cooperative enhancements to allout mode without changes to the mode, | ||
| 2047 | itself. | ||
| 2048 | |||
| 2049 | See `allout-exposure-change-hook', `allout-structure-added-hook', | ||
| 2050 | `allout-structure-deleted-hook', and `allout-structure-shifted-hook'. | ||
| 2051 | |||
| 2052 | `allout-exposure-change-hook' replaces the existing | ||
| 2053 | `allout-view-change-hook', which is being deprecated. Both are still | ||
| 2054 | invoked, but `allout-view-change-hook' will eventually be ignored. | ||
| 2055 | `allout-exposure-change-hook' is called with explicit arguments detailing | ||
| 2056 | the specifics of each change (as are the other new hooks), making it easier | ||
| 2057 | to use than the old version. | ||
| 2058 | |||
| 2059 | There is a new mode deactivation hook, `allout-mode-deactivate-hook', for | ||
| 2060 | coordinating with deactivation of allout-mode. Both that and the mode | ||
| 2061 | activation hook, `allout-mode-hook' are now run after the `allout-mode' | ||
| 2062 | variable is changed, rather than before. | ||
| 2063 | |||
| 2064 | *** Allout now uses text overlay's `invisible' property for concealed text, | ||
| 2065 | instead of selective-display. This simplifies the code, in particular | ||
| 2066 | avoiding the need for kludges for isearch dynamic-display, discretionary | ||
| 2067 | handling of edits of concealed text, undo concerns, etc. | ||
| 2068 | |||
| 2069 | *** There are many other fixes and refinements, including: | ||
| 2070 | |||
| 2071 | - repaired inhibition of inadvertent edits to concealed text, without | ||
| 2072 | inhibiting undo; we now reveal undo changes within concealed text. | ||
| 2073 | - auto-fill-mode is now left inactive when allout-mode starts, if it | ||
| 2074 | already was inactive. also, `allout-inhibit-auto-fill' custom | ||
| 2075 | configuration variable makes it easy to disable auto fill in allout | ||
| 2076 | outlines in general or on a per-buffer basis. | ||
| 2077 | - allout now tolerates fielded text in outlines without disruption. | ||
| 2078 | - hot-spot navigation now is modularized with a new function, | ||
| 2079 | `allout-hotspot-key-handler', enabling easier use and enhancement of | ||
| 2080 | the functionality in allout addons. | ||
| 2081 | - repaired retention of topic body hanging indent upon topic depth shifts | ||
| 2082 | - bulleting variation is simpler and more accommodating, both in the | ||
| 2083 | default behavior and in ability to vary when creating new topics | ||
| 2084 | - mode deactivation now does cleans up effectively, more properly | ||
| 2085 | restoring affected variables and hooks to former state, removing | ||
| 2086 | overlays, etc. see `allout-add-resumptions' and | ||
| 2087 | `allout-do-resumptions', which replace the old `allout-resumptions'. | ||
| 2088 | - included a few unit-tests for interior functionality. developers can | ||
| 2089 | have them automatically run at the end of module load by customizing | ||
| 2090 | the option `allout-run-unit-tests-on-load'. | ||
| 2091 | - many, many other, more minor tweaks, fixes, and refinements. | ||
| 2092 | - version number incremented to 2.2 | ||
| 2093 | |||
| 2094 | ** Hideshow mode changes | ||
| 2095 | |||
| 2096 | *** New variable `hs-set-up-overlay' allows customization of the overlay | ||
| 2097 | used to effect hiding for hideshow minor mode. Integration with isearch | ||
| 2098 | handles the overlay property `display' specially, preserving it during | ||
| 2099 | temporary overlay showing in the course of an isearch operation. | ||
| 2100 | |||
| 2101 | *** New variable `hs-allow-nesting' non-nil means that hiding a block does | ||
| 2102 | not discard the hidden state of any "internal" blocks; when the parent | ||
| 2103 | block is later shown, the internal blocks remain hidden. Default is nil. | ||
| 2104 | |||
| 2105 | ** FFAP changes | ||
| 2106 | |||
| 2107 | *** New ffap commands and keybindings: | ||
| 2108 | |||
| 2109 | C-x C-r (`ffap-read-only'), | ||
| 2110 | C-x C-v (`ffap-alternate-file'), C-x C-d (`ffap-list-directory'), | ||
| 2111 | C-x 4 r (`ffap-read-only-other-window'), C-x 4 d (`ffap-dired-other-window'), | ||
| 2112 | C-x 5 r (`ffap-read-only-other-frame'), C-x 5 d (`ffap-dired-other-frame'). | ||
| 2113 | |||
| 2114 | *** FFAP accepts wildcards in a file name by default. | ||
| 2115 | |||
| 2116 | C-x C-f passes the file name to `find-file' with non-nil WILDCARDS | ||
| 2117 | argument, which visits multiple files, and C-x d passes it to `dired'. | ||
| 2118 | |||
| 2119 | ** Changes in Skeleton | ||
| 2120 | |||
| 2121 | *** In skeleton.el, `-' marks the `skeleton-point' without interregion interaction. | ||
| 2122 | |||
| 2123 | `@' has reverted to only setting `skeleton-positions' and no longer | ||
| 2124 | sets `skeleton-point'. Skeletons which used @ to mark | ||
| 2125 | `skeleton-point' independent of `_' should now use `-' instead. The | ||
| 2126 | updated `skeleton-insert' docstring explains these new features along | ||
| 2127 | with other details of skeleton construction. | ||
| 2128 | |||
| 2129 | *** The variables `skeleton-transformation', `skeleton-filter', and | ||
| 2130 | `skeleton-pair-filter' have been renamed to | ||
| 2131 | `skeleton-transformation-function', `skeleton-filter-function', and | ||
| 2132 | `skeleton-pair-filter-function'. The old names are still available | ||
| 2133 | as aliases. | ||
| 2134 | |||
| 2135 | ** HTML/SGML changes | ||
| 2136 | |||
| 2137 | *** Emacs now tries to set up buffer coding systems for HTML/XML files | ||
| 2138 | automatically. | ||
| 2139 | |||
| 2140 | *** SGML mode has indentation and supports XML syntax. | ||
| 2141 | The new variable `sgml-xml-mode' tells SGML mode to use XML syntax. | ||
| 2142 | When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style, | ||
| 2143 | i.e., there is always a closing tag. | ||
| 2144 | By default, its setting is inferred on a buffer-by-buffer basis | ||
| 2145 | from the file name or buffer contents. | ||
| 2146 | |||
| 2147 | *** The variable `sgml-transformation' has been renamed to | ||
| 2148 | `sgml-transformation-function'. The old name is still available as | ||
| 2149 | alias. | ||
| 2150 | |||
| 2151 | *** `xml-mode' is now an alias for `sgml-mode', which has XML support. | ||
| 2152 | |||
| 2153 | ** TeX modes | ||
| 2154 | |||
| 2155 | *** New major mode Doctex mode, for *.dtx files. | ||
| 2156 | |||
| 2157 | *** C-c C-c prompts for a command to run, and tries to offer a good default. | ||
| 2158 | |||
| 2159 | *** The user option `tex-start-options-string' has been replaced | ||
| 2160 | by two new user options: `tex-start-options', which should hold | ||
| 2161 | command-line options to feed to TeX, and `tex-start-commands' which should hold | ||
| 2162 | TeX commands to use at startup. | ||
| 2163 | |||
| 2164 | *** verbatim environments are now highlighted in courier by font-lock | ||
| 2165 | and super/sub-scripts are made into super/sub-scripts. | ||
| 2166 | |||
| 2167 | ** RefTeX mode changes | ||
| 2168 | |||
| 2169 | *** Changes to RefTeX's table of contents | ||
| 2170 | |||
| 2171 | The new command keys "<" and ">" in the TOC buffer promote/demote the | ||
| 2172 | section at point or all sections in the current region, with full | ||
| 2173 | support for multifile documents. | ||
| 2174 | |||
| 2175 | The new command `reftex-toc-recenter' (`C-c -') shows the current | ||
| 2176 | section in the TOC buffer without selecting the TOC window. | ||
| 2177 | Recentering can happen automatically in idle time when the option | ||
| 2178 | `reftex-auto-recenter-toc' is turned on. The highlight in the TOC | ||
| 2179 | buffer stays when the focus moves to a different window. A dedicated | ||
| 2180 | frame can show the TOC with the current section always automatically | ||
| 2181 | highlighted. The frame is created and deleted from the toc buffer | ||
| 2182 | with the `d' key. | ||
| 2183 | |||
| 2184 | The toc window can be split off horizontally instead of vertically. | ||
| 2185 | See new option `reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally'. | ||
| 2186 | |||
| 2187 | Labels can be renamed globally from the table of contents using the | ||
| 2188 | key `M-%'. | ||
| 2189 | |||
| 2190 | The new command `reftex-goto-label' jumps directly to a label | ||
| 2191 | location. | ||
| 2192 | |||
| 2193 | *** Changes related to citations and BibTeX database files | ||
| 2194 | |||
| 2195 | Commands that insert a citation now prompt for optional arguments when | ||
| 2196 | called with a prefix argument. Related new options are | ||
| 2197 | `reftex-cite-prompt-optional-args' and `reftex-cite-cleanup-optional-args'. | ||
| 2198 | |||
| 2199 | The new command `reftex-create-bibtex-file' creates a BibTeX database | ||
| 2200 | with all entries referenced in the current document. The keys "e" and | ||
| 2201 | "E" allow to produce a BibTeX database file from entries marked in a | ||
| 2202 | citation selection buffer. | ||
| 2203 | |||
| 2204 | The command `reftex-citation' uses the word in the buffer before the | ||
| 2205 | cursor as a default search string. | ||
| 2206 | |||
| 2207 | The support for chapterbib has been improved. Different chapters can | ||
| 2208 | now use BibTeX or an explicit `thebibliography' environment. | ||
| 2209 | |||
| 2210 | The macros which specify the bibliography file (like \bibliography) | ||
| 2211 | can be configured with the new option `reftex-bibliography-commands'. | ||
| 2212 | |||
| 2213 | Support for jurabib has been added. | ||
| 2214 | |||
| 2215 | *** Global index matched may be verified with a user function. | ||
| 2216 | |||
| 2217 | During global indexing, a user function can verify an index match. | ||
| 2218 | See new option `reftex-index-verify-function'. | ||
| 2219 | |||
| 2220 | *** Parsing documents with many labels can be sped up. | ||
| 2221 | |||
| 2222 | Operating in a document with thousands of labels can be sped up | ||
| 2223 | considerably by allowing RefTeX to derive the type of a label directly | ||
| 2224 | from the label prefix like `eq:' or `fig:'. The option | ||
| 2225 | `reftex-trust-label-prefix' needs to be configured in order to enable | ||
| 2226 | this feature. While the speed-up is significant, this may reduce the | ||
| 2227 | quality of the context offered by RefTeX to describe a label. | ||
| 2228 | |||
| 2229 | *** Miscellaneous changes | ||
| 2230 | |||
| 2231 | The macros which input a file in LaTeX (like \input, \include) can be | ||
| 2232 | configured in the new option `reftex-include-file-commands'. | ||
| 2233 | |||
| 2234 | RefTeX supports global incremental search. | ||
| 2235 | |||
| 2236 | ** BibTeX mode | ||
| 2237 | |||
| 2238 | *** The new command `bibtex-url' browses a URL for the BibTeX entry at | ||
| 2239 | point (bound to C-c C-l and mouse-2, RET on clickable fields). | ||
| 2240 | |||
| 2241 | *** The new command `bibtex-entry-update' (bound to C-c C-u) updates | ||
| 2242 | an existing BibTeX entry by inserting fields that may occur but are not | ||
| 2243 | present. | ||
| 2244 | |||
| 2245 | *** New `bibtex-entry-format' option `required-fields', enabled by default. | ||
| 2246 | |||
| 2247 | *** `bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries' can take values `plain', | ||
| 2248 | `crossref', and `entry-class' which control the sorting scheme used | ||
| 2249 | for BibTeX entries. `bibtex-sort-entry-class' controls the sorting | ||
| 2250 | scheme `entry-class'. TAB completion for reference keys and | ||
| 2251 | automatic detection of duplicates does not require anymore that | ||
| 2252 | `bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries' is non-nil. | ||
| 2253 | |||
| 2254 | *** The new command `bibtex-complete' completes word fragment before | ||
| 2255 | point according to context (bound to M-tab). | ||
| 2256 | |||
| 2257 | *** In BibTeX mode the command `fill-paragraph' (M-q) fills | ||
| 2258 | individual fields of a BibTeX entry. | ||
| 2259 | |||
| 2260 | *** The new variable `bibtex-autofill-types' contains a list of entry | ||
| 2261 | types for which fields are filled automatically (if possible). | ||
| 2262 | |||
| 2263 | *** The new commands `bibtex-find-entry' and `bibtex-find-crossref' | ||
| 2264 | locate entries and crossref'd entries (bound to C-c C-s and C-c C-x). | ||
| 2265 | Crossref fields are clickable (bound to mouse-2, RET). | ||
| 2266 | |||
| 2267 | *** The new variables `bibtex-files' and `bibtex-file-path' define a set | ||
| 2268 | of BibTeX files that are searched for entry keys. | ||
| 2269 | |||
| 2270 | *** The new command `bibtex-validate-globally' checks for duplicate keys | ||
| 2271 | in multiple BibTeX files. | ||
| 2272 | |||
| 2273 | *** If the new variable `bibtex-autoadd-commas' is non-nil, | ||
| 2274 | automatically add missing commas at end of BibTeX fields. | ||
| 2275 | |||
| 2276 | *** The new command `bibtex-copy-summary-as-kill' pushes summary | ||
| 2277 | of BibTeX entry to kill ring (bound to C-c C-t). | ||
| 2278 | |||
| 2279 | *** If the new variable `bibtex-parse-keys-fast' is non-nil, | ||
| 2280 | use fast but simplified algorithm for parsing BibTeX keys. | ||
| 2281 | |||
| 2282 | *** The new variables bibtex-expand-strings and | ||
| 2283 | bibtex-autokey-expand-strings control the expansion of strings when | ||
| 2284 | extracting the content of a BibTeX field. | ||
| 2285 | |||
| 2286 | *** The variables `bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert' and | ||
| 2287 | `bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert' have been renamed to | ||
| 2288 | `bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert-function' and | ||
| 2289 | `bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert-function'. The old names are | ||
| 2290 | still available as aliases. | ||
| 2291 | |||
| 2292 | ** GUD changes | ||
| 2293 | |||
| 2294 | *** The new package gdb-ui.el provides an enhanced graphical interface to | ||
| 2295 | GDB. You can interact with GDB through the GUD buffer in the usual way, but | ||
| 2296 | there are also further buffers which control the execution and describe the | ||
| 2297 | state of your program. It can separate the input/output of your program from | ||
| 2298 | that of GDB and watches expressions in the speedbar. It also uses features of | ||
| 2299 | Emacs 21/22 such as the toolbar, and bitmaps in the fringe to indicate | ||
| 2300 | breakpoints. | ||
| 2301 | |||
| 2302 | To use this package just type M-x gdb. See the Emacs manual if you want the | ||
| 2303 | old behaviour. | ||
| 2304 | |||
| 2305 | *** GUD mode has its own tool bar for controlling execution of the inferior | ||
| 2306 | and other common debugger commands. | ||
| 2307 | |||
| 2308 | *** In GUD mode, when talking to GDB, C-x C-a C-j "jumps" the program | ||
| 2309 | counter to the specified source line (the one where point is). | ||
| 2310 | |||
| 2311 | *** The variable tooltip-gud-tips-p has been removed. GUD tooltips can now be | ||
| 2312 | toggled independently of normal tooltips with the minor mode | ||
| 2313 | `gud-tooltip-mode'. | ||
| 2314 | |||
| 2315 | *** In graphical mode, with a C program, GUD Tooltips have been extended to | ||
| 2316 | display the #define directive associated with an identifier when program is | ||
| 2317 | not executing. | ||
| 2318 | |||
| 2319 | *** GUD mode improvements for jdb: | ||
| 2320 | |||
| 2321 | **** Search for source files using jdb classpath and class information. | ||
| 2322 | Fast startup since there is no need to scan all source files up front. | ||
| 2323 | There is also no need to create and maintain lists of source | ||
| 2324 | directories to scan. Look at `gud-jdb-use-classpath' and | ||
| 2325 | `gud-jdb-classpath' customization variables documentation. | ||
| 2326 | |||
| 2327 | **** The previous method of searching for source files has been | ||
| 2328 | preserved in case someone still wants/needs to use it. | ||
| 2329 | Set `gud-jdb-use-classpath' to nil. | ||
| 2330 | |||
| 2331 | **** Supports the standard breakpoint (gud-break, gud-clear) | ||
| 2332 | set/clear operations from Java source files under the classpath, stack | ||
| 2333 | traversal (gud-up, gud-down), and run until current stack finish | ||
| 2334 | (gud-finish). | ||
| 2335 | |||
| 2336 | **** Supports new jdb (Java 1.2 and later) in addition to oldjdb | ||
| 2337 | (Java 1.1 jdb). | ||
| 2338 | |||
| 2339 | *** Added jdb Customization Variables | ||
| 2340 | |||
| 2341 | **** `gud-jdb-command-name'. What command line to use to invoke jdb. | ||
| 2342 | |||
| 2343 | **** `gud-jdb-use-classpath'. Allows selection of java source file searching | ||
| 2344 | method: set to t for new method, nil to scan `gud-jdb-directories' for | ||
| 2345 | java sources (previous method). | ||
| 2346 | |||
| 2347 | **** `gud-jdb-directories'. List of directories to scan and search for Java | ||
| 2348 | classes using the original gud-jdb method (if `gud-jdb-use-classpath' | ||
| 2349 | is nil). | ||
| 2350 | |||
| 2351 | *** Minor Improvements | ||
| 2352 | |||
| 2353 | **** The STARTTLS wrapper (starttls.el) can now use GNUTLS | ||
| 2354 | instead of the OpenSSL based `starttls' tool. For backwards | ||
| 2355 | compatibility, it prefers `starttls', but you can toggle | ||
| 2356 | `starttls-use-gnutls' to switch to GNUTLS (or simply remove the | ||
| 2357 | `starttls' tool). | ||
| 2358 | |||
| 2359 | **** Do not allow debugger output history variable to grow without bounds. | ||
| 2360 | |||
| 2361 | ** Lisp mode changes | ||
| 2362 | |||
| 2363 | *** Lisp mode now uses `font-lock-doc-face' for doc strings. | ||
| 2364 | |||
| 2365 | *** C-u C-M-q in Emacs Lisp mode pretty-prints the list after point. | ||
| 2366 | |||
| 2367 | *** New features in evaluation commands | ||
| 2368 | |||
| 2369 | **** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) called on defface reinitializes | ||
| 2370 | the face to the value specified in the defface expression. | ||
| 2371 | |||
| 2372 | **** Typing C-x C-e twice prints the value of the integer result | ||
| 2373 | in additional formats (octal, hexadecimal, character) specified | ||
| 2374 | by the new function `eval-expression-print-format'. The same | ||
| 2375 | function also defines the result format for `eval-expression' (M-:), | ||
| 2376 | `eval-print-last-sexp' (C-j) and some edebug evaluation functions. | ||
| 2377 | |||
| 2378 | ** Changes to cmuscheme | ||
| 2379 | |||
| 2380 | *** Emacs now offers to start Scheme if the user tries to | ||
| 2381 | evaluate a Scheme expression but no Scheme subprocess is running. | ||
| 2382 | |||
| 2383 | *** If the file ~/.emacs_NAME or ~/.emacs.d/init_NAME.scm (where NAME | ||
| 2384 | is the name of the Scheme interpreter) exists, its contents are sent | ||
| 2385 | to the Scheme subprocess upon startup. | ||
| 2386 | |||
| 2387 | *** There are new commands to instruct the Scheme interpreter to trace | ||
| 2388 | procedure calls (`scheme-trace-procedure') and to expand syntactic forms | ||
| 2389 | (`scheme-expand-current-form'). The commands actually sent to the Scheme | ||
| 2390 | subprocess are controlled by the user options `scheme-trace-command', | ||
| 2391 | `scheme-untrace-command' and `scheme-expand-current-form'. | ||
| 2392 | |||
| 2393 | ** Ewoc changes | ||
| 2394 | |||
| 2395 | *** The new function `ewoc-delete' deletes specified nodes. | ||
| 2396 | |||
| 2397 | *** `ewoc-create' now takes optional arg NOSEP, which inhibits insertion of | ||
| 2398 | a newline after each pretty-printed entry and after the header and footer. | ||
| 2399 | This allows you to create multiple-entry ewocs on a single line and to | ||
| 2400 | effect "invisible" nodes by arranging for the pretty-printer to not print | ||
| 2401 | anything for those nodes. | ||
| 2402 | |||
| 2403 | For example, these two sequences of expressions behave identically: | ||
| 2404 | |||
| 2405 | ;; NOSEP nil | ||
| 2406 | (defun PP (data) (insert (format "%S" data))) | ||
| 2407 | (ewoc-create 'PP "start\n") | ||
| 2408 | |||
| 2409 | ;; NOSEP t | ||
| 2410 | (defun PP (data) (insert (format "%S\n" data))) | ||
| 2411 | (ewoc-create 'PP "start\n\n" "\n" t) | ||
| 2412 | |||
| 2413 | ** CC mode changes | ||
| 2414 | |||
| 2415 | *** The CC Mode manual has been extensively revised. | ||
| 2416 | The information about using CC Mode has been separated from the larger | ||
| 2417 | and more difficult chapters about configuration. | ||
| 2418 | |||
| 2419 | *** New Minor Modes | ||
| 2420 | **** Electric Minor Mode toggles the electric action of non-alphabetic keys. | ||
| 2421 | The new command c-toggle-electric-mode is bound to C-c C-l. Turning the | ||
| 2422 | mode off can be helpful for editing chaotically indented code and for | ||
| 2423 | users new to CC Mode, who sometimes find electric indentation | ||
| 2424 | disconcerting. Its current state is displayed in the mode line with an | ||
| 2425 | 'l', e.g. "C/al". | ||
| 2426 | |||
| 2427 | **** Subword Minor Mode makes Emacs recognize word boundaries at upper case | ||
| 2428 | letters in StudlyCapsIdentifiers. You enable this feature by C-c C-w. It can | ||
| 2429 | also be used in non-CC Mode buffers. :-) Contributed by Masatake YAMATO. | ||
| 2430 | |||
| 2431 | *** Support for the AWK language. | ||
| 2432 | Support for the AWK language has been introduced. The implementation is | ||
| 2433 | based around GNU AWK version 3.1, but it should work pretty well with | ||
| 2434 | any AWK. As yet, not all features of CC Mode have been adapted for AWK. | ||
| 2435 | Here is a summary: | ||
| 2436 | |||
| 2437 | **** Indentation Engine | ||
| 2438 | The CC Mode indentation engine fully supports AWK mode. | ||
| 2439 | |||
| 2440 | AWK mode handles code formatted in the conventional AWK fashion: `{'s | ||
| 2441 | which start actions, user-defined functions, or compound statements are | ||
| 2442 | placed on the same line as the associated construct; the matching `}'s | ||
| 2443 | are normally placed under the start of the respective pattern, function | ||
| 2444 | definition, or structured statement. | ||
| 2445 | |||
| 2446 | The predefined line-up functions haven't yet been adapted for AWK | ||
| 2447 | mode, though some of them may work serendipitously. There shouldn't | ||
| 2448 | be any problems writing custom indentation functions for AWK mode. | ||
| 2449 | |||
| 2450 | **** Font Locking | ||
| 2451 | There is a single level of font locking in AWK mode, rather than the | ||
| 2452 | three distinct levels the other modes have. There are several | ||
| 2453 | idiosyncrasies in AWK mode's font-locking due to the peculiarities of | ||
| 2454 | the AWK language itself. | ||
| 2455 | |||
| 2456 | **** Comment and Movement Commands | ||
| 2457 | These commands all work for AWK buffers. The notion of "defun" has | ||
| 2458 | been augmented to include AWK pattern-action pairs - the standard | ||
| 2459 | "defun" commands on key sequences C-M-a, C-M-e, and C-M-h use this | ||
| 2460 | extended definition. | ||
| 2461 | |||
| 2462 | **** "awk" style, Auto-newline Insertion and Clean-ups | ||
| 2463 | A new style, "awk" has been introduced, and this is now the default | ||
| 2464 | style for AWK code. With auto-newline enabled, the clean-up | ||
| 2465 | c-one-liner-defun (see above) is useful. | ||
| 2466 | |||
| 2467 | *** Font lock support. | ||
| 2468 | CC Mode now provides font lock support for all its languages. This | ||
| 2469 | supersedes the font lock patterns that have been in the core font lock | ||
| 2470 | package for C, C++, Java and Objective-C. Like indentation, font | ||
| 2471 | locking is done in a uniform way across all languages (except the new | ||
| 2472 | AWK mode - see below). That means that the new font locking will be | ||
| 2473 | different from the old patterns in various details for most languages. | ||
| 2474 | |||
| 2475 | The main goal of the font locking in CC Mode is accuracy, to provide a | ||
| 2476 | dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like | ||
| 2477 | strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others like | ||
| 2478 | declarations and types can be very tricky. CC Mode can go to great | ||
| 2479 | lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when | ||
| 2480 | the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly | ||
| 2481 | demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can | ||
| 2482 | therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the | ||
| 2483 | variable font-lock-maximum-decoration. | ||
| 2484 | |||
| 2485 | Note that the most demanding font lock level has been tuned with lazy | ||
| 2486 | fontification in mind; Just-In-Time-Lock mode should be enabled for | ||
| 2487 | the highest font lock level (by default, it is). Fontifying a file | ||
| 2488 | with several thousand lines in one go can take the better part of a | ||
| 2489 | minute. | ||
| 2490 | |||
| 2491 | **** The (c|c++|objc|java|idl|pike)-font-lock-extra-types variables | ||
| 2492 | are now used by CC Mode to recognize identifiers that are certain to | ||
| 2493 | be types. (They are also used in cases that aren't related to font | ||
| 2494 | locking.) At the maximum decoration level, types are often recognized | ||
| 2495 | properly anyway, so these variables should be fairly restrictive and | ||
| 2496 | not contain patterns for uncertain types. | ||
| 2497 | |||
| 2498 | **** Support for documentation comments. | ||
| 2499 | There is a "plugin" system to fontify documentation comments like | ||
| 2500 | Javadoc and the markup within them. It's independent of the host | ||
| 2501 | language, so it's possible to e.g. turn on Javadoc font locking in C | ||
| 2502 | buffers. See the variable c-doc-comment-style for details. | ||
| 2503 | |||
| 2504 | Currently three kinds of doc comment styles are recognized: Sun's | ||
| 2505 | Javadoc, Autodoc (which is used in Pike) and GtkDoc (used in C). (The | ||
| 2506 | last was contributed by Masatake YAMATO). This is by no means a | ||
| 2507 | complete list of the most common tools; if your doc comment extractor | ||
| 2508 | of choice is missing then please drop a note to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org. | ||
| 2509 | |||
| 2510 | **** Better handling of C++ templates. | ||
| 2511 | As a side effect of the more accurate font locking, C++ templates are | ||
| 2512 | now handled much better. The angle brackets that delimit them are | ||
| 2513 | given parenthesis syntax so that they can be navigated like other | ||
| 2514 | parens. | ||
| 2515 | |||
| 2516 | This also improves indentation of templates, although there still is | ||
| 2517 | work to be done in that area. E.g. it's required that multiline | ||
| 2518 | template clauses are written in full and then refontified to be | ||
| 2519 | recognized, and the indentation of nested templates is a bit odd and | ||
| 2520 | not as configurable as it ought to be. | ||
| 2521 | |||
| 2522 | **** Improved handling of Objective-C and CORBA IDL. | ||
| 2523 | Especially the support for Objective-C and IDL has gotten an overhaul. | ||
| 2524 | The special "@" declarations in Objective-C are handled correctly. | ||
| 2525 | All the keywords used in CORBA IDL, PSDL, and CIDL are recognized and | ||
| 2526 | handled correctly, also wrt indentation. | ||
| 2527 | |||
| 2528 | *** Changes in Key Sequences | ||
| 2529 | **** c-toggle-auto-hungry-state is no longer bound to C-c C-t. | ||
| 2530 | |||
| 2531 | **** c-toggle-hungry-state is no longer bound to C-c C-d. | ||
| 2532 | This binding has been taken over by c-hungry-delete-forwards. | ||
| 2533 | |||
| 2534 | **** c-toggle-auto-state (C-c C-t) has been renamed to c-toggle-auto-newline. | ||
| 2535 | c-toggle-auto-state remains as an alias. | ||
| 2536 | |||
| 2537 | **** The new commands c-hungry-backspace and c-hungry-delete-forwards | ||
| 2538 | have key bindings C-c C-DEL (or C-c DEL, for the benefit of TTYs) and | ||
| 2539 | C-c C-d (or C-c C-<delete> or C-c <delete>) respectively. These | ||
| 2540 | commands delete entire blocks of whitespace with a single | ||
| 2541 | key-sequence. [N.B. "DEL" is the <backspace> key.] | ||
| 2542 | |||
| 2543 | **** The new command c-toggle-electric-mode is bound to C-c C-l. | ||
| 2544 | |||
| 2545 | **** The new command c-subword-mode is bound to C-c C-w. | ||
| 2546 | |||
| 2547 | *** C-c C-s (`c-show-syntactic-information') now highlights the anchor | ||
| 2548 | position(s). | ||
| 2549 | |||
| 2550 | *** New syntactic symbols in IDL mode. | ||
| 2551 | The top level constructs "module" and "composition" (from CIDL) are | ||
| 2552 | now handled like "namespace" in C++: They are given syntactic symbols | ||
| 2553 | module-open, module-close, inmodule, composition-open, | ||
| 2554 | composition-close, and incomposition. | ||
| 2555 | |||
| 2556 | *** New functions to do hungry delete without enabling hungry delete mode. | ||
| 2557 | The new functions `c-hungry-backspace' and `c-hungry-delete-forward' | ||
| 2558 | provide hungry deletion without having to toggle a mode. They are | ||
| 2559 | bound to C-c C-DEL and C-c C-d (and several variants, for the benefit | ||
| 2560 | of different keyboard setups. See "Changes in key sequences" above). | ||
| 2561 | |||
| 2562 | *** Better control over `require-final-newline'. | ||
| 2563 | |||
| 2564 | The variable `c-require-final-newline' specifies which of the modes | ||
| 2565 | implemented by CC mode should insert final newlines. Its value is a | ||
| 2566 | list of modes, and only those modes should do it. By default the list | ||
| 2567 | includes C, C++ and Objective-C modes. | ||
| 2568 | |||
| 2569 | Whichever modes are in this list will set `require-final-newline' | ||
| 2570 | based on `mode-require-final-newline'. | ||
| 2571 | |||
| 2572 | *** Format change for syntactic context elements. | ||
| 2573 | |||
| 2574 | The elements in the syntactic context returned by `c-guess-basic-syntax' | ||
| 2575 | and stored in `c-syntactic-context' has been changed somewhat to allow | ||
| 2576 | attaching more information. They are now lists instead of single cons | ||
| 2577 | cells. E.g. a line that previously had the syntactic analysis | ||
| 2578 | |||
| 2579 | ((inclass . 11) (topmost-intro . 13)) | ||
| 2580 | |||
| 2581 | is now analyzed as | ||
| 2582 | |||
| 2583 | ((inclass 11) (topmost-intro 13)) | ||
| 2584 | |||
| 2585 | In some cases there are more than one position given for a syntactic | ||
| 2586 | symbol. | ||
| 2587 | |||
| 2588 | This change might affect code that calls `c-guess-basic-syntax' | ||
| 2589 | directly, and custom lineup functions if they use | ||
| 2590 | `c-syntactic-context'. However, the argument given to lineup | ||
| 2591 | functions is still a single cons cell with nil or an integer in the | ||
| 2592 | cdr. | ||
| 2593 | |||
| 2594 | *** API changes for derived modes. | ||
| 2595 | |||
| 2596 | There have been extensive changes "under the hood" which can affect | ||
| 2597 | derived mode writers. Some of these changes are likely to cause | ||
| 2598 | incompatibilities with existing derived modes, but on the other hand | ||
| 2599 | care has now been taken to make it possible to extend and modify CC | ||
| 2600 | Mode with less risk of such problems in the future. | ||
| 2601 | |||
| 2602 | **** New language variable system. | ||
| 2603 | These are variables whose values vary between CC Mode's different | ||
| 2604 | languages. See the comment blurb near the top of cc-langs.el. | ||
| 2605 | |||
| 2606 | **** New initialization functions. | ||
| 2607 | The initialization procedure has been split up into more functions to | ||
| 2608 | give better control: `c-basic-common-init', `c-font-lock-init', and | ||
| 2609 | `c-init-language-vars'. | ||
| 2610 | |||
| 2611 | *** Changes in analysis of nested syntactic constructs. | ||
| 2612 | The syntactic analysis engine has better handling of cases where | ||
| 2613 | several syntactic constructs appear nested on the same line. They are | ||
| 2614 | now handled as if each construct started on a line of its own. | ||
| 2615 | |||
| 2616 | This means that CC Mode now indents some cases differently, and | ||
| 2617 | although it's more consistent there might be cases where the old way | ||
| 2618 | gave results that's more to one's liking. So if you find a situation | ||
| 2619 | where you think that the indentation has become worse, please report | ||
| 2620 | it to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org. | ||
| 2621 | |||
| 2622 | **** New syntactic symbol substatement-label. | ||
| 2623 | This symbol is used when a label is inserted between a statement and | ||
| 2624 | its substatement. E.g: | ||
| 2625 | |||
| 2626 | if (x) | ||
| 2627 | x_is_true: | ||
| 2628 | do_stuff(); | ||
| 2629 | |||
| 2630 | *** Better handling of multiline macros. | ||
| 2631 | |||
| 2632 | **** Syntactic indentation inside macros. | ||
| 2633 | The contents of multiline #define's are now analyzed and indented | ||
| 2634 | syntactically just like other code. This can be disabled by the new | ||
| 2635 | variable `c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros'. A new syntactic symbol | ||
| 2636 | `cpp-define-intro' has been added to control the initial indentation | ||
| 2637 | inside `#define's. | ||
| 2638 | |||
| 2639 | **** New lineup function `c-lineup-cpp-define'. | ||
| 2640 | |||
| 2641 | Now used by default to line up macro continuation lines. The behavior | ||
| 2642 | of this function closely mimics the indentation one gets if the macro | ||
| 2643 | is indented while the line continuation backslashes are temporarily | ||
| 2644 | removed. If syntactic indentation in macros is turned off, it works | ||
| 2645 | much line `c-lineup-dont-change', which was used earlier, but handles | ||
| 2646 | empty lines within the macro better. | ||
| 2647 | |||
| 2648 | **** Automatically inserted newlines continues the macro if used within one. | ||
| 2649 | This applies to the newlines inserted by the auto-newline mode, and to | ||
| 2650 | `c-context-line-break' and `c-context-open-line'. | ||
| 2651 | |||
| 2652 | **** Better alignment of line continuation backslashes. | ||
| 2653 | `c-backslash-region' tries to adapt to surrounding backslashes. New | ||
| 2654 | variable `c-backslash-max-column' puts a limit on how far out | ||
| 2655 | backslashes can be moved. | ||
| 2656 | |||
| 2657 | **** Automatic alignment of line continuation backslashes. | ||
| 2658 | This is controlled by the new variable `c-auto-align-backslashes'. It | ||
| 2659 | affects `c-context-line-break', `c-context-open-line' and newlines | ||
| 2660 | inserted in Auto-Newline mode. | ||
| 2661 | |||
| 2662 | **** Line indentation works better inside macros. | ||
| 2663 | Regardless whether syntactic indentation and syntactic indentation | ||
| 2664 | inside macros are enabled or not, line indentation now ignores the | ||
| 2665 | line continuation backslashes. This is most noticeable when syntactic | ||
| 2666 | indentation is turned off and there are empty lines (save for the | ||
| 2667 | backslash) in the macro. | ||
| 2668 | |||
| 2669 | *** indent-for-comment is more customizable. | ||
| 2670 | The behavior of M-; (indent-for-comment) is now configurable through | ||
| 2671 | the variable `c-indent-comment-alist'. The indentation behavior is | ||
| 2672 | based on the preceding code on the line, e.g. to get two spaces after | ||
| 2673 | #else and #endif but indentation to `comment-column' in most other | ||
| 2674 | cases (something which was hardcoded earlier). | ||
| 2675 | |||
| 2676 | *** New function `c-context-open-line'. | ||
| 2677 | It's the open-line equivalent of `c-context-line-break'. | ||
| 2678 | |||
| 2679 | *** New clean-ups | ||
| 2680 | |||
| 2681 | **** `comment-close-slash'. | ||
| 2682 | With this clean-up, a block (i.e. c-style) comment can be terminated by | ||
| 2683 | typing a slash at the start of a line. | ||
| 2684 | |||
| 2685 | **** `c-one-liner-defun' | ||
| 2686 | This clean-up compresses a short enough defun (for example, an AWK | ||
| 2687 | pattern/action pair) onto a single line. "Short enough" is configurable. | ||
| 2688 | |||
| 2689 | *** New lineup functions | ||
| 2690 | |||
| 2691 | **** `c-lineup-string-cont' | ||
| 2692 | This lineup function lines up a continued string under the one it | ||
| 2693 | continues. E.g: | ||
| 2694 | |||
| 2695 | result = prefix + "A message " | ||
| 2696 | "string."; <- c-lineup-string-cont | ||
| 2697 | |||
| 2698 | **** `c-lineup-cascaded-calls' | ||
| 2699 | Lines up series of calls separated by "->" or ".". | ||
| 2700 | |||
| 2701 | **** `c-lineup-knr-region-comment' | ||
| 2702 | Gives (what most people think is) better indentation of comments in | ||
| 2703 | the "K&R region" between the function header and its body. | ||
| 2704 | |||
| 2705 | **** `c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg' | ||
| 2706 | Provides better indentation inside asm blocks. | ||
| 2707 | |||
| 2708 | **** `c-lineup-argcont' | ||
| 2709 | Lines up continued function arguments after the preceding comma. | ||
| 2710 | |||
| 2711 | *** Added toggle for syntactic indentation. | ||
| 2712 | The function `c-toggle-syntactic-indentation' can be used to toggle | ||
| 2713 | syntactic indentation. | ||
| 2714 | |||
| 2715 | *** Better caching of the syntactic context. | ||
| 2716 | CC Mode caches the positions of the opening parentheses (of any kind) | ||
| 2717 | of the lists surrounding the point. Those positions are used in many | ||
| 2718 | places as anchor points for various searches. The cache is now | ||
| 2719 | improved so that it can be reused to a large extent when the point is | ||
| 2720 | moved. The less it moves, the less needs to be recalculated. | ||
| 2721 | |||
| 2722 | The effect is that CC Mode should be fast most of the time even when | ||
| 2723 | opening parens are hung (i.e. aren't in column zero). It's typically | ||
| 2724 | only the first time after the point is moved far down in a complex | ||
| 2725 | file that it'll take noticeable time to find out the syntactic | ||
| 2726 | context. | ||
| 2727 | |||
| 2728 | *** Statements are recognized in a more robust way. | ||
| 2729 | Statements are recognized most of the time even when they occur in an | ||
| 2730 | "invalid" context, e.g. in a function argument. In practice that can | ||
| 2731 | happen when macros are involved. | ||
| 2732 | |||
| 2733 | *** Improved the way `c-indent-exp' chooses the block to indent. | ||
| 2734 | It now indents the block for the closest sexp following the point | ||
| 2735 | whose closing paren ends on a different line. This means that the | ||
| 2736 | point doesn't have to be immediately before the block to indent. | ||
| 2737 | Also, only the block and the closing line is indented; the current | ||
| 2738 | line is left untouched. | ||
| 2739 | |||
| 2740 | ** Changes in Makefile mode | ||
| 2741 | |||
| 2742 | *** Makefile mode has submodes for automake, gmake, makepp, BSD make and imake. | ||
| 2743 | |||
| 2744 | The former two couldn't be differentiated before, and the latter three | ||
| 2745 | are new. Font-locking is robust now and offers new customizable | ||
| 2746 | faces. | ||
| 2747 | |||
| 2748 | *** The variable `makefile-query-one-target-method' has been renamed | ||
| 2749 | to `makefile-query-one-target-method-function'. The old name is still | ||
| 2750 | available as alias. | ||
| 2751 | |||
| 2752 | ** Sql changes | ||
| 2753 | |||
| 2754 | *** The variable `sql-product' controls the highlighting of different | ||
| 2755 | SQL dialects. This variable can be set globally via Customize, on a | ||
| 2756 | buffer-specific basis via local variable settings, or for the current | ||
| 2757 | session using the new SQL->Product submenu. (This menu replaces the | ||
| 2758 | SQL->Highlighting submenu.) | ||
| 2759 | |||
| 2760 | The following values are supported: | ||
| 2761 | |||
| 2762 | ansi ANSI Standard (default) | ||
| 2763 | db2 DB2 | ||
| 2764 | informix Informix | ||
| 2765 | ingres Ingres | ||
| 2766 | interbase Interbase | ||
| 2767 | linter Linter | ||
| 2768 | ms Microsoft | ||
| 2769 | mysql MySQL | ||
| 2770 | oracle Oracle | ||
| 2771 | postgres Postgres | ||
| 2772 | solid Solid | ||
| 2773 | sqlite SQLite | ||
| 2774 | sybase Sybase | ||
| 2775 | |||
| 2776 | The current product name will be shown on the mode line following the | ||
| 2777 | SQL mode indicator. | ||
| 2778 | |||
| 2779 | The technique of setting `sql-mode-font-lock-defaults' directly in | ||
| 2780 | your `.emacs' will no longer establish the default highlighting -- Use | ||
| 2781 | `sql-product' to accomplish this. | ||
| 2782 | |||
| 2783 | ANSI keywords are always highlighted. | ||
| 2784 | |||
| 2785 | *** The function `sql-add-product-keywords' can be used to add | ||
| 2786 | font-lock rules to the product specific rules. For example, to have | ||
| 2787 | all identifiers ending in `_t' under MS SQLServer treated as a type, | ||
| 2788 | you would use the following line in your .emacs file: | ||
| 2789 | |||
| 2790 | (sql-add-product-keywords 'ms | ||
| 2791 | '(("\\<\\w+_t\\>" . font-lock-type-face))) | ||
| 2792 | |||
| 2793 | *** Oracle support includes keyword highlighting for Oracle 9i. | ||
| 2794 | |||
| 2795 | Most SQL and PL/SQL keywords are implemented. SQL*Plus commands are | ||
| 2796 | highlighted in `font-lock-doc-face'. | ||
| 2797 | |||
| 2798 | *** Microsoft SQLServer support has been significantly improved. | ||
| 2799 | |||
| 2800 | Keyword highlighting for SqlServer 2000 is implemented. | ||
| 2801 | sql-interactive-mode defaults to use osql, rather than isql, because | ||
| 2802 | osql flushes its error stream more frequently. Thus error messages | ||
| 2803 | are displayed when they occur rather than when the session is | ||
| 2804 | terminated. | ||
| 2805 | |||
| 2806 | If the username and password are not provided to `sql-ms', osql is | ||
| 2807 | called with the `-E' command line argument to use the operating system | ||
| 2808 | credentials to authenticate the user. | ||
| 2809 | |||
| 2810 | *** Postgres support is enhanced. | ||
| 2811 | Keyword highlighting of Postgres 7.3 is implemented. Prompting for | ||
| 2812 | the username and the pgsql `-U' option is added. | ||
| 2813 | |||
| 2814 | *** MySQL support is enhanced. | ||
| 2815 | Keyword highlighting of MySql 4.0 is implemented. | ||
| 2816 | |||
| 2817 | *** Imenu support has been enhanced to locate tables, views, indexes, | ||
| 2818 | packages, procedures, functions, triggers, sequences, rules, and | ||
| 2819 | defaults. | ||
| 2820 | |||
| 2821 | *** Added SQL->Start SQLi Session menu entry which calls the | ||
| 2822 | appropriate `sql-interactive-mode' wrapper for the current setting of | ||
| 2823 | `sql-product'. | ||
| 2824 | |||
| 2825 | *** sql.el supports the SQLite interpreter--call 'sql-sqlite'. | ||
| 2826 | |||
| 2827 | ** Fortran mode changes | ||
| 2828 | |||
| 2829 | *** F90 mode and Fortran mode have support for `hs-minor-mode' (hideshow). | ||
| 2830 | It cannot deal with every code format, but ought to handle a sizeable | ||
| 2831 | majority. | ||
| 2832 | |||
| 2833 | *** F90 mode and Fortran mode have new navigation commands | ||
| 2834 | `f90-end-of-block', `f90-beginning-of-block', `f90-next-block', | ||
| 2835 | `f90-previous-block', `fortran-end-of-block', | ||
| 2836 | `fortran-beginning-of-block'. | ||
| 2837 | |||
| 2838 | *** Fortran mode does more font-locking by default. Use level 3 | ||
| 2839 | highlighting for the old default. | ||
| 2840 | |||
| 2841 | *** Fortran mode has a new variable `fortran-directive-re'. | ||
| 2842 | Adapt this to match the format of any compiler directives you use. | ||
| 2843 | Lines that match are never indented, and are given distinctive font-locking. | ||
| 2844 | |||
| 2845 | *** The new function `f90-backslash-not-special' can be used to change | ||
| 2846 | the syntax of backslashes in F90 buffers. | ||
| 2847 | |||
| 2848 | ** Miscellaneous programming mode changes | ||
| 2849 | |||
| 2850 | *** In sh-script, a continuation line is only indented if the backslash was | ||
| 2851 | preceded by a SPC or a TAB. | ||
| 2852 | |||
| 2853 | *** Perl mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'. | ||
| 2854 | |||
| 2855 | *** The old Octave mode bindings C-c f and C-c i have been changed | ||
| 2856 | to C-c C-f and C-c C-i. The C-c C-i subcommands now have duplicate | ||
| 2857 | bindings on control characters--thus, C-c C-i C-b is the same as | ||
| 2858 | C-c C-i b, and so on. | ||
| 2859 | |||
| 2860 | *** Prolog mode has a new variable `prolog-font-lock-keywords' | ||
| 2861 | to support use of font-lock. | ||
| 2862 | |||
| 2863 | ** VC Changes | ||
| 2864 | |||
| 2865 | *** New backends for Subversion and Meta-CVS. | ||
| 2866 | |||
| 2867 | *** The new variable `vc-cvs-global-switches' specifies switches that | ||
| 2868 | are passed to any CVS command invoked by VC. | ||
| 2869 | |||
| 2870 | These switches are used as "global options" for CVS, which means they | ||
| 2871 | are inserted before the command name. For example, this allows you to | ||
| 2872 | specify a compression level using the `-z#' option for CVS. | ||
| 2873 | |||
| 2874 | *** The key C-x C-q only changes the read-only state of the buffer | ||
| 2875 | (toggle-read-only). It no longer checks files in or out. | ||
| 2876 | |||
| 2877 | We made this change because we held a poll and found that many users | ||
| 2878 | were unhappy with the previous behavior. If you do prefer this | ||
| 2879 | behavior, you can bind `vc-toggle-read-only' to C-x C-q in your | ||
| 2880 | `.emacs' file: | ||
| 2881 | |||
| 2882 | (global-set-key "\C-x\C-q" 'vc-toggle-read-only) | ||
| 2883 | |||
| 2884 | The function `vc-toggle-read-only' will continue to exist. | ||
| 2885 | |||
| 2886 | *** VC-Annotate mode enhancements | ||
| 2887 | |||
| 2888 | In VC-Annotate mode, you can now use the following key bindings for | ||
| 2889 | enhanced functionality to browse the annotations of past revisions, or | ||
| 2890 | to view diffs or log entries directly from vc-annotate-mode: | ||
| 2891 | |||
| 2892 | P: annotates the previous revision | ||
| 2893 | N: annotates the next revision | ||
| 2894 | J: annotates the revision at line | ||
| 2895 | A: annotates the revision previous to line | ||
| 2896 | D: shows the diff of the revision at line with its previous revision | ||
| 2897 | L: shows the log of the revision at line | ||
| 2898 | W: annotates the workfile (most up to date) version | ||
| 2899 | |||
| 2900 | ** pcl-cvs changes | ||
| 2901 | |||
| 2902 | *** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d y' command to view the diffs | ||
| 2903 | between the local version of the file and yesterday's head revision | ||
| 2904 | in the repository. | ||
| 2905 | |||
| 2906 | *** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d r' command to view the changes | ||
| 2907 | anyone has committed to the repository since you last executed | ||
| 2908 | `checkout', `update' or `commit'. That means using cvs diff options | ||
| 2909 | -rBASE -rHEAD. | ||
| 2910 | |||
| 2911 | ** Diff changes | ||
| 2912 | |||
| 2913 | *** M-x diff uses Diff mode instead of Compilation mode. | ||
| 2914 | |||
| 2915 | *** Diff mode key bindings changed. | ||
| 2916 | |||
| 2917 | These are the new bindings: | ||
| 2918 | |||
| 2919 | C-c C-e diff-ediff-patch (old M-A) | ||
| 2920 | C-c C-n diff-restrict-view (old M-r) | ||
| 2921 | C-c C-r diff-reverse-direction (old M-R) | ||
| 2922 | C-c C-u diff-context->unified (old M-U) | ||
| 2923 | C-c C-w diff-refine-hunk (old C-c C-r) | ||
| 2924 | |||
| 2925 | To convert unified to context format, use C-u C-c C-u. | ||
| 2926 | In addition, C-c C-u now operates on the region | ||
| 2927 | in Transient Mark mode when the mark is active. | ||
| 2928 | |||
| 2929 | ** EDiff changes. | ||
| 2930 | |||
| 2931 | *** When comparing directories. | ||
| 2932 | Typing D brings up a buffer that lists the differences between the contents of | ||
| 2933 | directories. Now it is possible to use this buffer to copy the missing files | ||
| 2934 | from one directory to another. | ||
| 2935 | |||
| 2936 | *** When comparing files or buffers. | ||
| 2937 | Typing the = key now offers to perform the word-by-word comparison of the | ||
| 2938 | currently highlighted regions in an inferior Ediff session. If you answer 'n' | ||
| 2939 | then it reverts to the old behavior and asks the user to select regions for | ||
| 2940 | comparison. | ||
| 2941 | |||
| 2942 | *** The new command `ediff-backup' compares a file with its most recent | ||
| 2943 | backup using `ediff'. If you specify the name of a backup file, | ||
| 2944 | `ediff-backup' compares it with the file of which it is a backup. | ||
| 2945 | |||
| 2946 | ** Etags changes. | ||
| 2947 | |||
| 2948 | *** New regular expressions features | ||
| 2949 | |||
| 2950 | **** New syntax for regular expressions, multi-line regular expressions. | ||
| 2951 | |||
| 2952 | The syntax --ignore-case-regexp=/regex/ is now undocumented and retained | ||
| 2953 | only for backward compatibility. The new equivalent syntax is | ||
| 2954 | --regex=/regex/i. More generally, it is --regex=/TAGREGEX/TAGNAME/MODS, | ||
| 2955 | where `/TAGNAME' is optional, as usual, and MODS is a string of 0 or | ||
| 2956 | more characters among `i' (ignore case), `m' (multi-line) and `s' | ||
| 2957 | (single-line). The `m' and `s' modifiers behave as in Perl regular | ||
| 2958 | expressions: `m' allows regexps to match more than one line, while `s' | ||
| 2959 | (which implies `m') means that `.' matches newlines. The ability to | ||
| 2960 | span newlines allows writing of much more powerful regular expressions | ||
| 2961 | and rapid prototyping for tagging new languages. | ||
| 2962 | |||
| 2963 | **** Regular expressions can use char escape sequences as in GCC. | ||
| 2964 | |||
| 2965 | The escaped character sequence \a, \b, \d, \e, \f, \n, \r, \t, \v, | ||
| 2966 | respectively, stand for the ASCII characters BEL, BS, DEL, ESC, FF, NL, | ||
| 2967 | CR, TAB, VT. | ||
| 2968 | |||
| 2969 | **** Regular expressions can be bound to a given language. | ||
| 2970 | |||
| 2971 | The syntax --regex={LANGUAGE}REGEX means that REGEX is used to make tags | ||
| 2972 | only for files of language LANGUAGE, and ignored otherwise. This is | ||
| 2973 | particularly useful when storing regexps in a file. | ||
| 2974 | |||
| 2975 | **** Regular expressions can be read from a file. | ||
| 2976 | |||
| 2977 | The --regex=@regexfile option means read the regexps from a file, one | ||
| 2978 | per line. Lines beginning with space or tab are ignored. | ||
| 2979 | |||
| 2980 | *** New language parsing features | ||
| 2981 | |||
| 2982 | **** New language HTML. | ||
| 2983 | |||
| 2984 | Tags are generated for `title' as well as `h1', `h2', and `h3'. Also, | ||
| 2985 | when `name=' is used inside an anchor and whenever `id=' is used. | ||
| 2986 | |||
| 2987 | **** New language PHP. | ||
| 2988 | |||
| 2989 | Functions, classes and defines are tags. If the --members option is | ||
| 2990 | specified to etags, variables are tags also. | ||
| 2991 | |||
| 2992 | **** New language Lua. | ||
| 2993 | |||
| 2994 | All functions are tagged. | ||
| 2995 | |||
| 2996 | **** The `::' qualifier triggers C++ parsing in C file. | ||
| 2997 | |||
| 2998 | Previously, only the `template' and `class' keywords had this effect. | ||
| 2999 | |||
| 3000 | **** The GCC __attribute__ keyword is now recognized and ignored. | ||
| 3001 | |||
| 3002 | **** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for #undef | ||
| 3003 | |||
| 3004 | **** In Makefiles, constants are tagged. | ||
| 3005 | |||
| 3006 | If you want the old behavior instead, thus avoiding to increase the | ||
| 3007 | size of the tags file, use the --no-globals option. | ||
| 3008 | |||
| 3009 | **** In Perl, packages are tags. | ||
| 3010 | |||
| 3011 | Subroutine tags are named from their package. You can jump to sub tags | ||
| 3012 | as you did before, by the sub name, or additionally by looking for | ||
| 3013 | package::sub. | ||
| 3014 | |||
| 3015 | **** In Prolog, etags creates tags for rules in addition to predicates. | ||
| 3016 | |||
| 3017 | **** New default keywords for TeX. | ||
| 3018 | |||
| 3019 | The new keywords are def, newcommand, renewcommand, newenvironment and | ||
| 3020 | renewenvironment. | ||
| 3021 | |||
| 3022 | *** Honor #line directives. | ||
| 3023 | |||
| 3024 | When Etags parses an input file that contains C preprocessor's #line | ||
| 3025 | directives, it creates tags using the file name and line number | ||
| 3026 | specified in those directives. This is useful when dealing with code | ||
| 3027 | created from Cweb source files. When Etags tags the generated file, it | ||
| 3028 | writes tags pointing to the source file. | ||
| 3029 | |||
| 3030 | *** New option --parse-stdin=FILE. | ||
| 3031 | |||
| 3032 | This option is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can | ||
| 3033 | be used (only once) in place of a file name on the command line. Etags | ||
| 3034 | reads from standard input and marks the produced tags as belonging to | ||
| 3035 | the file FILE. | ||
| 3036 | |||
| 3037 | *** The --members option is now the default. | ||
| 3038 | |||
| 3039 | Use --no-members if you want the old default behaviour of not tagging | ||
| 3040 | struct members in C, members variables in C++ and variables in PHP. | ||
| 3041 | |||
| 3042 | ** Ctags changes. | ||
| 3043 | |||
| 3044 | *** Ctags now allows duplicate tags | ||
| 3045 | |||
| 3046 | ** Rmail changes | ||
| 3047 | |||
| 3048 | *** Support for `movemail' from GNU mailutils was added to Rmail. | ||
| 3049 | |||
| 3050 | This version of `movemail' allows to read mail from a wide range of | ||
| 3051 | mailbox formats, including remote POP3 and IMAP4 mailboxes with or | ||
| 3052 | without TLS encryption. If GNU mailutils is installed on the system | ||
| 3053 | and its version of `movemail' can be found in exec-path, it will be | ||
| 3054 | used instead of the native one. | ||
| 3055 | |||
| 3056 | *** The new commands rmail-end-of-message and rmail-summary end-of-message, | ||
| 3057 | by default bound to `/', go to the end of the current mail message in | ||
| 3058 | Rmail and Rmail summary buffers. | ||
| 3059 | |||
| 3060 | *** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer. | ||
| 3061 | |||
| 3062 | ** Gnus package | ||
| 3063 | |||
| 3064 | *** Gnus now includes Sieve and PGG | ||
| 3065 | |||
| 3066 | Sieve is a library for managing Sieve scripts. PGG is a library to handle | ||
| 3067 | PGP/MIME. | ||
| 3068 | |||
| 3069 | *** There are many news features, bug fixes and improvements. | ||
| 3070 | |||
| 3071 | See the file GNUS-NEWS or the node "Oort Gnus" in the Gnus manual for details. | ||
| 3072 | |||
| 3073 | ** MH-E changes. | ||
| 3074 | |||
| 3075 | Upgraded to MH-E version 8.0.3. There have been major changes since | ||
| 3076 | version 5.0.2; see MH-E-NEWS for details. | ||
| 3077 | |||
| 3078 | ** Miscellaneous mail changes | ||
| 3079 | |||
| 3080 | *** The new variable `mail-default-directory' specifies | ||
| 3081 | `default-directory' for mail buffers. This directory is used for | ||
| 3082 | auto-save files of mail buffers. It defaults to "~/". | ||
| 3083 | |||
| 3084 | *** The mode line can indicate new mail in a directory or file. | ||
| 3085 | |||
| 3086 | See the documentation of the user option `display-time-mail-directory'. | ||
| 3087 | |||
| 3088 | ** Calendar changes | ||
| 3089 | |||
| 3090 | *** There is a new calendar package, icalendar.el, that can be used to | ||
| 3091 | convert Emacs diary entries to/from the iCalendar format. | ||
| 3092 | |||
| 3093 | *** The new package cal-html.el writes HTML files with calendar and | ||
| 3094 | diary entries. | ||
| 3095 | |||
| 3096 | *** The new functions `diary-from-outlook', `diary-from-outlook-gnus', | ||
| 3097 | and `diary-from-outlook-rmail' can be used to import diary entries | ||
| 3098 | from Outlook-format appointments in mail messages. The variable | ||
| 3099 | `diary-outlook-formats' can be customized to recognize additional | ||
| 3100 | formats. | ||
| 3101 | |||
| 3102 | *** The procedure for activating appointment reminders has changed: | ||
| 3103 | use the new function `appt-activate'. The new variable | ||
| 3104 | `appt-display-format' controls how reminders are displayed, replacing | ||
| 3105 | `appt-issue-message', `appt-visible', and `appt-msg-window'. | ||
| 3106 | |||
| 3107 | *** The function `simple-diary-display' now by default sets a header line. | ||
| 3108 | This can be controlled through the variables `diary-header-line-flag' | ||
| 3109 | and `diary-header-line-format'. | ||
| 3110 | |||
| 3111 | *** Diary sexp entries can have custom marking in the calendar. | ||
| 3112 | Diary sexp functions which only apply to certain days (such as | ||
| 3113 | `diary-block' or `diary-cyclic') now take an optional parameter MARK, | ||
| 3114 | which is the name of a face or a single-character string indicating | ||
| 3115 | how to highlight the day in the calendar display. Specifying a | ||
| 3116 | single-character string as @var{mark} places the character next to the | ||
| 3117 | day in the calendar. Specifying a face highlights the day with that | ||
| 3118 | face. This lets you have different colors or markings for vacations, | ||
| 3119 | appointments, paydays or anything else using a sexp. | ||
| 3120 | |||
| 3121 | *** The meanings of C-x < and C-x > have been interchanged. | ||
| 3122 | < means to scroll backward in time, and > means to scroll forward. | ||
| 3123 | |||
| 3124 | *** You can now use < and >, instead of C-x < and C-x >, to scroll | ||
| 3125 | the calendar left or right. | ||
| 3126 | |||
| 3127 | *** The new function `calendar-goto-day-of-year' (g D) prompts for a | ||
| 3128 | year and day number, and moves to that date. Negative day numbers | ||
| 3129 | count backward from the end of the year. | ||
| 3130 | |||
| 3131 | *** The new Calendar function `calendar-goto-iso-week' (g w) | ||
| 3132 | prompts for a year and a week number, and moves to the first | ||
| 3133 | day of that ISO week. | ||
| 3134 | |||
| 3135 | *** The functions `holiday-easter-etc' and `holiday-advent' now take | ||
| 3136 | optional arguments, in order to only report on the specified holiday | ||
| 3137 | rather than all. This makes customization of variables such as | ||
| 3138 | `christian-holidays' simpler. | ||
| 3139 | |||
| 3140 | *** The new variable `calendar-minimum-window-height' affects the | ||
| 3141 | window generated by the function `generate-calendar-window'. | ||
| 3142 | |||
| 3143 | ** Speedbar changes | ||
| 3144 | |||
| 3145 | *** Speedbar items can now be selected by clicking mouse-1, based on | ||
| 3146 | the `mouse-1-click-follows-link' mechanism. | ||
| 3147 | |||
| 3148 | *** The new command `speedbar-toggle-line-expansion', bound to SPC, | ||
| 3149 | contracts or expands the line under the cursor. | ||
| 3150 | |||
| 3151 | *** New command `speedbar-create-directory', bound to `M'. | ||
| 3152 | |||
| 3153 | *** The new commands `speedbar-expand-line-descendants' and | ||
| 3154 | `speedbar-contract-line-descendants', bound to `[' and `]' | ||
| 3155 | respectively, expand and contract the line under cursor with all of | ||
| 3156 | its descendents. | ||
| 3157 | |||
| 3158 | *** The new user option `speedbar-use-tool-tips-flag', if non-nil, | ||
| 3159 | means to display tool-tips for speedbar items. | ||
| 3160 | |||
| 3161 | *** The new user option `speedbar-query-confirmation-method' controls | ||
| 3162 | how querying is performed for file operations. A value of 'always | ||
| 3163 | means to always query before file operations; 'none-but-delete means | ||
| 3164 | to not query before any file operations, except before a file | ||
| 3165 | deletion. | ||
| 3166 | |||
| 3167 | *** The new user option `speedbar-select-frame-method' specifies how | ||
| 3168 | to select a frame for displaying a file opened with the speedbar. A | ||
| 3169 | value of 'attached means to use the attached frame (the frame that | ||
| 3170 | speedbar was started from.) A number such as 1 or -1 means to pass | ||
| 3171 | that number to `other-frame'. | ||
| 3172 | |||
| 3173 | *** SPC and DEL are no longer bound to scroll up/down in the speedbar | ||
| 3174 | keymap. | ||
| 3175 | |||
| 3176 | *** The frame management code in speedbar.el has been split into a new | ||
| 3177 | `dframe' library. Emacs Lisp code that makes use of the speedbar | ||
| 3178 | should use `dframe-attached-frame' instead of | ||
| 3179 | `speedbar-attached-frame', `dframe-timer' instead of `speedbar-timer', | ||
| 3180 | `dframe-close-frame' instead of `speedbar-close-frame', and | ||
| 3181 | `dframe-activity-change-focus-flag' instead of | ||
| 3182 | `speedbar-activity-change-focus-flag'. The variables | ||
| 3183 | `speedbar-update-speed' and `speedbar-navigating-speed' are also | ||
| 3184 | obsolete; use `dframe-update-speed' instead. | ||
| 3185 | |||
| 3186 | ** battery.el changes | ||
| 3187 | |||
| 3188 | *** display-battery-mode replaces display-battery. | ||
| 3189 | |||
| 3190 | *** battery.el now works on recent versions of OS X. | ||
| 3191 | |||
| 3192 | ** Games | ||
| 3193 | |||
| 3194 | *** The game `mpuz' is enhanced. | ||
| 3195 | |||
| 3196 | `mpuz' now allows the 2nd factor not to have two identical digits. By | ||
| 3197 | default, all trivial operations involving whole lines are performed | ||
| 3198 | automatically. The game uses faces for better visual feedback. | ||
| 3199 | |||
| 3200 | ** Obsolete and deleted packages | ||
| 3201 | |||
| 3202 | *** fast-lock.el and lazy-lock.el are obsolete. Use jit-lock.el instead. | ||
| 3203 | |||
| 3204 | *** iso-acc.el is now obsolete. Use one of the latin input methods instead. | ||
| 3205 | |||
| 3206 | *** zone-mode.el is now obsolete. Use dns-mode.el instead. | ||
| 3207 | |||
| 3208 | *** cplus-md.el has been deleted. | ||
| 3209 | |||
| 3210 | ** Miscellaneous | ||
| 3211 | |||
| 3212 | *** The variable `woman-topic-at-point' is renamed | ||
| 3213 | to `woman-use-topic-at-point' and behaves differently: if this | ||
| 3214 | variable is non-nil, the `woman' command uses the word at point | ||
| 3215 | automatically, without asking for a confirmation. Otherwise, the word | ||
| 3216 | at point is suggested as default, but not inserted at the prompt. | ||
| 3217 | |||
| 3218 | *** You can now customize `fill-nobreak-predicate' to control where | ||
| 3219 | filling can break lines. The value is now normally a list of | ||
| 3220 | functions, but it can also be a single function, for compatibility. | ||
| 3221 | |||
| 3222 | Emacs provide two predicates, `fill-single-word-nobreak-p' and | ||
| 3223 | `fill-french-nobreak-p', for use as the value of | ||
| 3224 | `fill-nobreak-predicate'. | ||
| 3225 | |||
| 3226 | *** M-x view-file and commands that use it now avoid interfering | ||
| 3227 | with special modes such as Tar mode. | ||
| 3228 | |||
| 3229 | *** `global-whitespace-mode' is a new alias for `whitespace-global-mode'. | ||
| 3230 | |||
| 3231 | *** The saveplace.el package now filters out unreadable files. | ||
| 3232 | |||
| 3233 | When you exit Emacs, the saved positions in visited files no longer | ||
| 3234 | include files that aren't readable, e.g. files that don't exist. | ||
| 3235 | Customize the new option `save-place-forget-unreadable-files' to nil | ||
| 3236 | to get the old behavior. The new options `save-place-save-skipped' | ||
| 3237 | and `save-place-skip-check-regexp' allow further fine-tuning of this | ||
| 3238 | feature. | ||
| 3239 | |||
| 3240 | *** Commands `winner-redo' and `winner-undo', from winner.el, are now | ||
| 3241 | bound to C-c <left> and C-c <right>, respectively. This is an | ||
| 3242 | incompatible change. | ||
| 3243 | |||
| 3244 | *** The type-break package now allows `type-break-file-name' to be nil | ||
| 3245 | and if so, doesn't store any data across sessions. This is handy if | ||
| 3246 | you don't want the `.type-break' file in your home directory or are | ||
| 3247 | annoyed by the need for interaction when you kill Emacs. | ||
| 3248 | |||
| 3249 | *** `ps-print' can now print characters from the mule-unicode charsets. | ||
| 3250 | |||
| 3251 | Printing text with characters from the mule-unicode-* sets works with | ||
| 3252 | `ps-print', provided that you have installed the appropriate BDF | ||
| 3253 | fonts. See the file INSTALL for URLs where you can find these fonts. | ||
| 3254 | |||
| 3255 | *** New command `strokes-global-set-stroke-string'. | ||
| 3256 | This is like `strokes-global-set-stroke', but it allows you to bind | ||
| 3257 | the stroke directly to a string to insert. This is convenient for | ||
| 3258 | using strokes as an input method. | ||
| 3259 | |||
| 3260 | *** In Outline mode, `hide-body' no longer hides lines at the top | ||
| 3261 | of the file that precede the first header line. | ||
| 3262 | |||
| 3263 | *** `hide-ifdef-mode' now uses overlays rather than selective-display | ||
| 3264 | to hide its text. This should be mostly transparent but slightly | ||
| 3265 | changes the behavior of motion commands like C-e and C-p. | ||
| 3266 | |||
| 3267 | *** In Artist mode the variable `artist-text-renderer' has been | ||
| 3268 | renamed to `artist-text-renderer-function'. The old name is still | ||
| 3269 | available as alias. | ||
| 3270 | |||
| 3271 | *** In Enriched mode, `set-left-margin' and `set-right-margin' are now | ||
| 3272 | by default bound to `C-c [' and `C-c ]' instead of the former `C-c C-l' | ||
| 3273 | and `C-c C-r'. | ||
| 3274 | |||
| 3275 | *** `partial-completion-mode' now handles partial completion on directory names. | ||
| 3276 | |||
| 3277 | *** You can now disable pc-selection-mode after enabling it. | ||
| 3278 | |||
| 3279 | M-x pc-selection-mode behaves like a proper minor mode, and with no | ||
| 3280 | argument it toggles the mode. Turning off PC-Selection mode restores | ||
| 3281 | the global key bindings that were replaced by turning on the mode. | ||
| 3282 | |||
| 3283 | *** `uniquify-strip-common-suffix' tells uniquify to prefer | ||
| 3284 | `file|dir1' and `file|dir2' to `file|dir1/subdir' and `file|dir2/subdir'. | ||
| 3285 | |||
| 3286 | *** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'. | ||
| 3287 | |||
| 3288 | When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry always | ||
| 3289 | starts a new record regardless of when the last record is. | ||
| 3290 | |||
| 3291 | *** M-x compare-windows now can automatically skip non-matching text to | ||
| 3292 | resync points in both windows. | ||
| 3293 | |||
| 3294 | *** PO translation files are decoded according to their MIME headers | ||
| 3295 | when Emacs visits them. | ||
| 3296 | |||
| 3297 | *** Telnet now prompts you for a port number with C-u M-x telnet. | ||
| 3298 | |||
| 3299 | *** calculator.el now has radix grouping mode. | ||
| 3300 | |||
| 3301 | To enable this, set `calculator-output-radix' non-nil. In this mode a | ||
| 3302 | separator character is used every few digits, making it easier to see | ||
| 3303 | byte boundaries etc. For more info, see the documentation of the | ||
| 3304 | variable `calculator-radix-grouping-mode'. | ||
| 3305 | |||
| 3306 | *** LDAP support now defaults to ldapsearch from OpenLDAP version 2. | ||
| 3307 | |||
| 3308 | *** The terminal emulation code in term.el has been improved; it can | ||
| 3309 | run most curses applications now. | ||
| 3310 | |||
| 3311 | *** Support for `magic cookie' standout modes has been removed. | ||
| 3312 | |||
| 3313 | Emacs still works on terminals that require magic cookies in order to | ||
| 3314 | use standout mode, but they can no longer display mode-lines in | ||
| 3315 | inverse-video. | ||
| 3316 | |||
| 3317 | |||
| 3318 | * Changes in Emacs 22.1 on non-free operating systems | ||
| 3319 | |||
| 3320 | ** The HOME directory defaults to Application Data under the user profile. | ||
| 3321 | |||
| 3322 | If you used a previous version of Emacs without setting the HOME | ||
| 3323 | environment variable and a `.emacs' was saved, then Emacs will continue | ||
| 3324 | using C:/ as the default HOME. But if you are installing Emacs afresh, | ||
| 3325 | the default location will be the "Application Data" (or similar | ||
| 3326 | localized name) subdirectory of your user profile. A typical location | ||
| 3327 | of this directory is "C:\Documents and Settings\USERNAME\Application Data", | ||
| 3328 | where USERNAME is your user name. | ||
| 3329 | |||
| 3330 | This change means that users can now have their own `.emacs' files on | ||
| 3331 | shared computers, and the default HOME directory is less likely to be | ||
| 3332 | read-only on computers that are administered by someone else. | ||
| 3333 | |||
| 3334 | ** Images are now supported on MS Windows. | ||
| 3335 | |||
| 3336 | PBM and XBM images are supported out of the box. Other image formats | ||
| 3337 | depend on external libraries. All of these libraries have been ported | ||
| 3338 | to Windows, and can be found in both source and binary form at | ||
| 3339 | http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/. Note that libpng also depends on | ||
| 3340 | zlib, and tiff depends on the version of jpeg that it was compiled | ||
| 3341 | against. For additional information, see nt/INSTALL. | ||
| 3342 | |||
| 3343 | ** Sound is now supported on MS Windows. | ||
| 3344 | |||
| 3345 | WAV format is supported on all versions of Windows, other formats such | ||
| 3346 | as AU, AIFF and MP3 may be supported in the more recent versions of | ||
| 3347 | Windows, or when other software provides hooks into the system level | ||
| 3348 | sound support for those formats. | ||
| 3349 | |||
| 3350 | ** Tooltips now work on MS Windows. | ||
| 3351 | |||
| 3352 | See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details. | ||
| 3353 | |||
| 3354 | ** Pointing devices with more than 3 buttons are now supported on MS Windows. | ||
| 3355 | |||
| 3356 | The new variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' controls | ||
| 3357 | whether Emacs should handle the extra buttons itself (the default), or | ||
| 3358 | pass them to Windows to be handled with system-wide functions. | ||
| 3359 | |||
| 3360 | ** Passing resources on the command line now works on MS Windows. | ||
| 3361 | |||
| 3362 | You can use --xrm to pass resource settings to Emacs, overriding any | ||
| 3363 | existing values. For example: | ||
| 3364 | |||
| 3365 | emacs --xrm "Emacs.Background:red" --xrm "Emacs.Geometry:100x20" | ||
| 3366 | |||
| 3367 | will start up Emacs on an initial frame of 100x20 with red background, | ||
| 3368 | irrespective of geometry or background setting on the Windows registry. | ||
| 3369 | |||
| 3370 | ** Emacs takes note of colors defined in Control Panel on MS-Windows. | ||
| 3371 | |||
| 3372 | The Control Panel defines some default colors for applications in much | ||
| 3373 | the same way as wildcard X Resources do on X. Emacs now adds these | ||
| 3374 | colors to the colormap prefixed by System (eg SystemMenu for the | ||
| 3375 | default Menu background, SystemMenuText for the foreground), and uses | ||
| 3376 | some of them to initialize some of the default faces. | ||
| 3377 | `list-colors-display' shows the list of System color names, in case | ||
| 3378 | you wish to use them in other faces. | ||
| 3379 | |||
| 3380 | ** Running in a console window in Windows now uses the console size. | ||
| 3381 | |||
| 3382 | Previous versions of Emacs erred on the side of having a usable Emacs | ||
| 3383 | through telnet, even though that was inconvenient if you use Emacs in | ||
| 3384 | a local console window with a scrollback buffer. The default value of | ||
| 3385 | w32-use-full-screen-buffer is now nil, which favors local console | ||
| 3386 | windows. Recent versions of Windows telnet also work well with this | ||
| 3387 | setting. If you are using an older telnet server then Emacs detects | ||
| 3388 | that the console window dimensions that are reported are not sane, and | ||
| 3389 | defaults to 80x25. If you use such a telnet server regularly at a size | ||
| 3390 | other than 80x25, you can still manually set | ||
| 3391 | w32-use-full-screen-buffer to t. | ||
| 3392 | |||
| 3393 | ** Different shaped mouse pointers are supported on MS Windows. | ||
| 3394 | |||
| 3395 | The mouse pointer changes shape depending on what is under the pointer. | ||
| 3396 | |||
| 3397 | ** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor. | ||
| 3398 | |||
| 3399 | This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track the | ||
| 3400 | cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs. | ||
| 3401 | When such a program is in use, the system caret is made visible | ||
| 3402 | instead of Emacs drawing its own cursor. This seems to be required by | ||
| 3403 | some programs. The new variable w32-use-visible-system-caret allows | ||
| 3404 | the caret visibility to be manually toggled. | ||
| 3405 | |||
| 3406 | ** On MS Windows NT/W2K/XP, Emacs uses Unicode for clipboard operations. | ||
| 3407 | |||
| 3408 | Those systems use Unicode internally, so this allows Emacs to share | ||
| 3409 | multilingual text with other applications. On other versions of | ||
| 3410 | MS Windows, Emacs now uses the appropriate locale coding-system, so | ||
| 3411 | the clipboard should work correctly for your local language without | ||
| 3412 | any customizations. | ||
| 3413 | |||
| 3414 | ** On Mac OS, `keyboard-coding-system' changes based on the keyboard script. | ||
| 3415 | |||
| 3416 | ** The variable `mac-keyboard-text-encoding' and the constants | ||
| 3417 | `kTextEncodingMacRoman', `kTextEncodingISOLatin1', and | ||
| 3418 | `kTextEncodingISOLatin2' are obsolete. | ||
| 3419 | |||
| 3420 | ** The variable `mac-command-key-is-meta' is obsolete. Use | ||
| 3421 | `mac-command-modifier' and `mac-option-modifier' instead. | ||
| 3422 | |||
| 3423 | * Incompatible Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1 | ||
| 3424 | |||
| 3425 | ** Mode line display ignores text properties as well as the | ||
| 3426 | :propertize and :eval forms in the value of a variable whose | ||
| 3427 | `risky-local-variable' property is nil. | ||
| 3428 | |||
| 3429 | The function `comint-send-input' now accepts 3 optional arguments: | ||
| 3430 | |||
| 3431 | (comint-send-input &optional no-newline artificial) | ||
| 3432 | |||
| 3433 | Callers sending input not from the user should use bind the 3rd | ||
| 3434 | argument `artificial' to a non-nil value, to prevent Emacs from | ||
| 3435 | deleting the part of subprocess output that matches the input. | ||
| 3436 | |||
| 3437 | ** The `read-file-name' function now returns a null string if the | ||
| 3438 | user just types RET. | ||
| 3439 | |||
| 3440 | ** The variables post-command-idle-hook and post-command-idle-delay have | ||
| 3441 | been removed. Use run-with-idle-timer instead. | ||
| 3442 | |||
| 3443 | ** A hex or octal escape in a string constant forces the string to | ||
| 3444 | be multibyte or unibyte, respectively. | ||
| 3445 | |||
| 3446 | ** The explicit method of creating a display table element by | ||
| 3447 | combining a face number and a character code into a numeric | ||
| 3448 | glyph code is deprecated. | ||
| 3449 | |||
| 3450 | Instead, the new functions `make-glyph-code', `glyph-char', and | ||
| 3451 | `glyph-face' must be used to create and decode glyph codes in | ||
| 3452 | display tables. | ||
| 3453 | |||
| 3454 | ** `suppress-keymap' now works by remapping `self-insert-command' to | ||
| 3455 | the command `undefined'. (In earlier Emacs versions, it used | ||
| 3456 | `substitute-key-definition' to rebind self inserting characters to | ||
| 3457 | `undefined'.) | ||
| 3458 | |||
| 3459 | ** The third argument of `accept-process-output' is now milliseconds. | ||
| 3460 | It used to be microseconds. | ||
| 3461 | |||
| 3462 | ** The function find-operation-coding-system may be called with a cons | ||
| 3463 | (FILENAME . BUFFER) in the second argument if the first argument | ||
| 3464 | OPERATION is `insert-file-contents', and thus a function registered in | ||
| 3465 | `file-coding-system-alist' is also called with such an argument. | ||
| 3466 | |||
| 3467 | ** When Emacs receives a USR1 or USR2 signal, this generates | ||
| 3468 | input events: sigusr1 or sigusr2. Use special-event-map to | ||
| 3469 | handle these events. | ||
| 3470 | |||
| 3471 | ** The variable `memory-full' now remains t until | ||
| 3472 | there is no longer a shortage of memory. | ||
| 3473 | |||
| 3474 | ** Support for Mocklisp has been removed. | ||
| 3475 | |||
| 3476 | |||
| 3477 | * Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1 | ||
| 3478 | |||
| 3479 | ** General Lisp changes: | ||
| 3480 | |||
| 3481 | *** New syntax: \s now stands for the SPACE character. | ||
| 3482 | |||
| 3483 | `?\s' is a new way to write the space character. You must make sure | ||
| 3484 | it is not followed by a dash, since `?\s-...' indicates the "super" | ||
| 3485 | modifier. However, it would be strange to write a character constant | ||
| 3486 | and a following symbol (beginning with `-') with no space between | ||
| 3487 | them. | ||
| 3488 | |||
| 3489 | `\s' stands for space in strings, too, but it is not really meant for | ||
| 3490 | strings; it is easier and nicer just to write a space. | ||
| 3491 | |||
| 3492 | *** New syntax: \uXXXX and \UXXXXXXXX specify Unicode code points in hex. | ||
| 3493 | |||
| 3494 | For instance, you can use "\u0428" to specify a string consisting of | ||
| 3495 | CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHA, or `"U0001D6E2" to specify one consisting | ||
| 3496 | of MATHEMATICAL ITALIC CAPITAL ALPHA (the latter is greater than | ||
| 3497 | #xFFFF and thus needs the longer syntax). | ||
| 3498 | |||
| 3499 | This syntax works for both character constants and strings. | ||
| 3500 | |||
| 3501 | *** New function `unsafep' determines whether a Lisp form is safe. | ||
| 3502 | |||
| 3503 | It returns nil if the given Lisp form can't possibly do anything | ||
| 3504 | dangerous; otherwise it returns a reason why the form might be unsafe | ||
| 3505 | (calls unknown function, alters global variable, etc.). | ||
| 3506 | |||
| 3507 | *** The function `eql' is now available without requiring the CL package. | ||
| 3508 | |||
| 3509 | *** The new function `memql' is like `memq', but uses `eql' for comparison, | ||
| 3510 | that is, floats are compared by value and other elements with `eq'. | ||
| 3511 | |||
| 3512 | *** New functions `string-or-null-p' and `booleanp'. | ||
| 3513 | |||
| 3514 | `string-or-null-p' returns non-nil iff OBJECT is a string or nil. | ||
| 3515 | `booleanp' returns non-nil iff OBJECT is t or nil. | ||
| 3516 | |||
| 3517 | *** `makehash' is now obsolete. Use `make-hash-table' instead. | ||
| 3518 | |||
| 3519 | *** Minor change in the function `format'. | ||
| 3520 | |||
| 3521 | Some flags that were accepted but not implemented (such as "*") are no | ||
| 3522 | longer accepted. | ||
| 3523 | |||
| 3524 | *** `add-to-list' takes an optional third argument, APPEND. | ||
| 3525 | |||
| 3526 | If APPEND is non-nil, the new element gets added at the end of the | ||
| 3527 | list instead of at the beginning. This change actually occurred in | ||
| 3528 | Emacs 21.1, but was not documented then. | ||
| 3529 | |||
| 3530 | *** New function `add-to-ordered-list' is like `add-to-list' but | ||
| 3531 | associates a numeric ordering of each element added to the list. | ||
| 3532 | |||
| 3533 | *** New function `add-to-history' adds an element to a history list. | ||
| 3534 | |||
| 3535 | Lisp packages should use this function to add elements to their | ||
| 3536 | history lists. | ||
| 3537 | |||
| 3538 | If `history-delete-duplicates' is non-nil, it removes duplicates of | ||
| 3539 | the new element from the history list it updates. | ||
| 3540 | |||
| 3541 | *** New function `copy-tree' makes a copy of a tree. | ||
| 3542 | |||
| 3543 | It recursively copies through both CARs and CDRs. | ||
| 3544 | |||
| 3545 | *** New function `delete-dups' deletes `equal' duplicate elements from a list. | ||
| 3546 | |||
| 3547 | It modifies the list destructively, like `delete'. Of several `equal' | ||
| 3548 | occurrences of an element in the list, the one that's kept is the | ||
| 3549 | first one. | ||
| 3550 | |||
| 3551 | *** New function `rassq-delete-all'. | ||
| 3552 | |||
| 3553 | (rassq-delete-all VALUE ALIST) deletes, from ALIST, each element whose | ||
| 3554 | CDR is `eq' to the specified value. | ||
| 3555 | |||
| 3556 | *** Functions `get' and `plist-get' no longer give errors for bad plists. | ||
| 3557 | |||
| 3558 | They return nil for a malformed property list or if the list is | ||
| 3559 | cyclic. | ||
| 3560 | |||
| 3561 | *** New functions `lax-plist-get' and `lax-plist-put'. | ||
| 3562 | |||
| 3563 | They are like `plist-get' and `plist-put', except that they compare | ||
| 3564 | the property name using `equal' rather than `eq'. | ||
| 3565 | |||
| 3566 | *** The function `number-sequence' makes a list of equally-separated numbers. | ||
| 3567 | |||
| 3568 | For instance, (number-sequence 4 9) returns (4 5 6 7 8 9). By | ||
| 3569 | default, the separation is 1, but you can specify a different | ||
| 3570 | separation as the third argument. (number-sequence 1.5 6 2) returns | ||
| 3571 | (1.5 3.5 5.5). | ||
| 3572 | |||
| 3573 | *** New variables `most-positive-fixnum' and `most-negative-fixnum'. | ||
| 3574 | |||
| 3575 | They hold the largest and smallest possible integer values. | ||
| 3576 | |||
| 3577 | *** The function `expt' handles negative exponents differently. | ||
| 3578 | The value for `(expt A B)', if both A and B are integers and B is | ||
| 3579 | negative, is now a float. For example: (expt 2 -2) => 0.25. | ||
| 3580 | |||
| 3581 | *** The function `atan' now accepts an optional second argument. | ||
| 3582 | |||
| 3583 | When called with 2 arguments, as in `(atan Y X)', `atan' returns the | ||
| 3584 | angle in radians between the vector [X, Y] and the X axis. (This is | ||
| 3585 | equivalent to the standard C library function `atan2'.) | ||
| 3586 | |||
| 3587 | *** New macro `with-case-table' | ||
| 3588 | |||
| 3589 | This executes the body with the case table temporarily set to a given | ||
| 3590 | case table. | ||
| 3591 | |||
| 3592 | *** New macro `with-local-quit' temporarily allows quitting. | ||
| 3593 | |||
| 3594 | A quit inside the body of `with-local-quit' is caught by the | ||
| 3595 | `with-local-quit' form itself, but another quit will happen later once | ||
| 3596 | the code that has inhibited quitting exits. | ||
| 3597 | |||
| 3598 | This is for use around potentially blocking or long-running code | ||
| 3599 | inside timer functions and `post-command-hook' functions. | ||
| 3600 | |||
| 3601 | *** New macro `define-obsolete-function-alias'. | ||
| 3602 | |||
| 3603 | This combines `defalias' and `make-obsolete'. | ||
| 3604 | |||
| 3605 | *** New macro `eval-at-startup' specifies expressions to | ||
| 3606 | evaluate when Emacs starts up. If this is done after startup, | ||
| 3607 | it evaluates those expressions immediately. | ||
| 3608 | |||
| 3609 | This is useful in packages that can be preloaded. | ||
| 3610 | |||
| 3611 | *** New function `macroexpand-all' expands all macros in a form. | ||
| 3612 | |||
| 3613 | It is similar to the Common-Lisp function of the same name. | ||
| 3614 | One difference is that it guarantees to return the original argument | ||
| 3615 | if no expansion is done, which can be tested using `eq'. | ||
| 3616 | |||
| 3617 | *** A function or macro's doc string can now specify the calling pattern. | ||
| 3618 | |||
| 3619 | You put this info in the doc string's last line. It should be | ||
| 3620 | formatted so as to match the regexp "\n\n(fn .*)\\'". If you don't | ||
| 3621 | specify this explicitly, Emacs determines it from the actual argument | ||
| 3622 | names. Usually that default is right, but not always. | ||
| 3623 | |||
| 3624 | *** New variable `print-continuous-numbering'. | ||
| 3625 | |||
| 3626 | When this is non-nil, successive calls to print functions use a single | ||
| 3627 | numbering scheme for circular structure references. This is only | ||
| 3628 | relevant when `print-circle' is non-nil. | ||
| 3629 | |||
| 3630 | When you bind `print-continuous-numbering' to t, you should | ||
| 3631 | also bind `print-number-table' to nil. | ||
| 3632 | |||
| 3633 | *** `list-faces-display' takes an optional argument, REGEXP. | ||
| 3634 | |||
| 3635 | If it is non-nil, the function lists only faces matching this regexp. | ||
| 3636 | |||
| 3637 | *** New hook `command-error-function'. | ||
| 3638 | |||
| 3639 | By setting this variable to a function, you can control | ||
| 3640 | how the editor command loop shows the user an error message. | ||
| 3641 | |||
| 3642 | *** `debug-on-entry' accepts primitive functions that are not special forms. | ||
| 3643 | |||
| 3644 | ** Lisp code indentation features: | ||
| 3645 | |||
| 3646 | *** The `defmacro' form can contain indentation and edebug declarations. | ||
| 3647 | |||
| 3648 | These declarations specify how to indent the macro calls in Lisp mode | ||
| 3649 | and how to debug them with Edebug. You write them like this: | ||
| 3650 | |||
| 3651 | (defmacro NAME LAMBDA-LIST [DOC-STRING] [DECLARATION ...] ...) | ||
| 3652 | |||
| 3653 | DECLARATION is a list `(declare DECLARATION-SPECIFIER ...)'. The | ||
| 3654 | possible declaration specifiers are: | ||
| 3655 | |||
| 3656 | (indent INDENT) | ||
| 3657 | Set NAME's `lisp-indent-function' property to INDENT. | ||
| 3658 | |||
| 3659 | (edebug DEBUG) | ||
| 3660 | Set NAME's `edebug-form-spec' property to DEBUG. (This is | ||
| 3661 | equivalent to writing a `def-edebug-spec' for the macro, | ||
| 3662 | but this is cleaner.) | ||
| 3663 | |||
| 3664 | *** cl-indent now allows customization of Indentation of backquoted forms. | ||
| 3665 | |||
| 3666 | See the new user option `lisp-backquote-indentation'. | ||
| 3667 | |||
| 3668 | *** cl-indent now handles indentation of simple and extended `loop' forms. | ||
| 3669 | |||
| 3670 | The new user options `lisp-loop-keyword-indentation', | ||
| 3671 | `lisp-loop-forms-indentation', and `lisp-simple-loop-indentation' can | ||
| 3672 | be used to customize the indentation of keywords and forms in loop | ||
| 3673 | forms. | ||
| 3674 | |||
| 3675 | ** Variable aliases: | ||
| 3676 | |||
| 3677 | *** New function: defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR [DOCSTRING] | ||
| 3678 | |||
| 3679 | This function defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for | ||
| 3680 | symbol BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR | ||
| 3681 | returns the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR | ||
| 3682 | changes the value of BASE-VAR. | ||
| 3683 | |||
| 3684 | DOCSTRING, if present, is the documentation for ALIAS-VAR; else it has | ||
| 3685 | the same documentation as BASE-VAR. | ||
| 3686 | |||
| 3687 | *** The macro `define-obsolete-variable-alias' combines `defvaralias' and | ||
| 3688 | `make-obsolete-variable'. | ||
| 3689 | |||
| 3690 | *** New function: indirect-variable VARIABLE | ||
| 3691 | |||
| 3692 | This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases | ||
| 3693 | of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not | ||
| 3694 | defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE. | ||
| 3695 | |||
| 3696 | It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of | ||
| 3697 | variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables. | ||
| 3698 | |||
| 3699 | ** defcustom changes: | ||
| 3700 | |||
| 3701 | *** The package-version keyword has been added to provide | ||
| 3702 | `customize-changed-options' functionality to packages in the future. | ||
| 3703 | Developers who make use of this keyword must also update the new | ||
| 3704 | variable `customize-package-emacs-version-alist'. | ||
| 3705 | |||
| 3706 | *** The new customization type `float' requires a floating point number. | ||
| 3707 | |||
| 3708 | ** String changes: | ||
| 3709 | |||
| 3710 | *** A hex escape in a string constant forces the string to be multibyte. | ||
| 3711 | |||
| 3712 | *** An octal escape in a string constant forces the string to be unibyte. | ||
| 3713 | |||
| 3714 | *** New function `string-to-multibyte' converts a unibyte string to a | ||
| 3715 | multibyte string with the same individual character codes. | ||
| 3716 | |||
| 3717 | *** `split-string' now includes null substrings in the returned list if | ||
| 3718 | the optional argument SEPARATORS is non-nil and there are matches for | ||
| 3719 | SEPARATORS at the beginning or end of the string. If SEPARATORS is | ||
| 3720 | nil, or if the new optional third argument OMIT-NULLS is non-nil, all | ||
| 3721 | empty matches are omitted from the returned list. | ||
| 3722 | |||
| 3723 | *** The new function `assoc-string' replaces `assoc-ignore-case' and | ||
| 3724 | `assoc-ignore-representation', which are still available, but have | ||
| 3725 | been declared obsolete. | ||
| 3726 | |||
| 3727 | *** New function `substring-no-properties' returns a substring without | ||
| 3728 | text properties. | ||
| 3729 | |||
| 3730 | ** Displaying warnings to the user. | ||
| 3731 | |||
| 3732 | See the functions `warn' and `display-warning', or the Lisp Manual. | ||
| 3733 | If you want to be sure the warning will not be overlooked, this | ||
| 3734 | facility is much better than using `message', since it displays | ||
| 3735 | warnings in a separate window. | ||
| 3736 | |||
| 3737 | ** Progress reporters. | ||
| 3738 | |||
| 3739 | These provide a simple and uniform way for commands to present | ||
| 3740 | progress messages for the user. | ||
| 3741 | |||
| 3742 | See the new functions `make-progress-reporter', | ||
| 3743 | `progress-reporter-update', `progress-reporter-force-update', | ||
| 3744 | `progress-reporter-done', and `dotimes-with-progress-reporter'. | ||
| 3745 | |||
| 3746 | ** Buffer positions: | ||
| 3747 | |||
| 3748 | *** Function `compute-motion' now calculates the usable window | ||
| 3749 | width if the WIDTH argument is nil. If the TOPOS argument is nil, | ||
| 3750 | the usable window height and width is used. | ||
| 3751 | |||
| 3752 | *** The `line-move', `scroll-up', and `scroll-down' functions will now | ||
| 3753 | modify the window vscroll to scroll through display rows that are | ||
| 3754 | taller that the height of the window, for example in the presence of | ||
| 3755 | large images. To disable this feature, bind the new variable | ||
| 3756 | `auto-window-vscroll' to nil. | ||
| 3757 | |||
| 3758 | *** The argument to `forward-word', `backward-word' is optional. | ||
| 3759 | |||
| 3760 | It defaults to 1. | ||
| 3761 | |||
| 3762 | *** Argument to `forward-to-indentation' and `backward-to-indentation' is optional. | ||
| 3763 | |||
| 3764 | It defaults to 1. | ||
| 3765 | |||
| 3766 | *** `field-beginning' and `field-end' take new optional argument, LIMIT. | ||
| 3767 | |||
| 3768 | This argument tells them not to search beyond LIMIT. Instead they | ||
| 3769 | give up and return LIMIT. | ||
| 3770 | |||
| 3771 | *** New function `window-line-height' is an efficient way to get | ||
| 3772 | information about a specific text line in a window provided that the | ||
| 3773 | window's display is up-to-date. | ||
| 3774 | |||
| 3775 | *** New function `line-number-at-pos' returns the line number of a position. | ||
| 3776 | |||
| 3777 | It an optional buffer position argument that defaults to point. | ||
| 3778 | |||
| 3779 | *** Function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now returns the pixel coordinates | ||
| 3780 | and partial visibility state of the corresponding row, if the PARTIALLY | ||
| 3781 | arg is non-nil. | ||
| 3782 | |||
| 3783 | *** New functions `posn-at-point' and `posn-at-x-y' return | ||
| 3784 | click-event-style position information for a given visible buffer | ||
| 3785 | position or for a given window pixel coordinate. | ||
| 3786 | |||
| 3787 | *** New function `mouse-on-link-p' tests if a position is in a clickable link. | ||
| 3788 | |||
| 3789 | This is the function used by the new `mouse-1-click-follows-link' | ||
| 3790 | functionality. | ||
| 3791 | |||
| 3792 | ** Text modification: | ||
| 3793 | |||
| 3794 | *** The new function `buffer-chars-modified-tick' returns a buffer's | ||
| 3795 | tick counter for changes to characters. Each time text in that buffer | ||
| 3796 | is inserted or deleted, the character-change counter is updated to the | ||
| 3797 | tick counter (`buffer-modified-tick'). Text property changes leave it | ||
| 3798 | unchanged. | ||
| 3799 | |||
| 3800 | *** The new function `insert-for-yank' normally works like `insert', but | ||
| 3801 | removes the text properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list | ||
| 3802 | and handles the `yank-handler' text property. | ||
| 3803 | |||
| 3804 | *** The new function `insert-buffer-substring-as-yank' is like | ||
| 3805 | `insert-for-yank' except that it gets the text from another buffer as | ||
| 3806 | in `insert-buffer-substring'. | ||
| 3807 | |||
| 3808 | *** The new function `insert-buffer-substring-no-properties' is like | ||
| 3809 | `insert-buffer-substring', but removes all text properties from the | ||
| 3810 | inserted substring. | ||
| 3811 | |||
| 3812 | *** The new function `filter-buffer-substring' extracts a buffer | ||
| 3813 | substring, passes it through a set of filter functions, and returns | ||
| 3814 | the filtered substring. Use it instead of `buffer-substring' or | ||
| 3815 | `delete-and-extract-region' when copying text into a user-accessible | ||
| 3816 | data structure, such as the kill-ring, X clipboard, or a register. | ||
| 3817 | |||
| 3818 | The list of filter function is specified by the new variable | ||
| 3819 | `buffer-substring-filters'. For example, Longlines mode adds to | ||
| 3820 | `buffer-substring-filters' to remove soft newlines from the copied | ||
| 3821 | text. | ||
| 3822 | |||
| 3823 | *** Function `translate-region' accepts also a char-table as TABLE | ||
| 3824 | argument. | ||
| 3825 | |||
| 3826 | *** The new translation table `translation-table-for-input' | ||
| 3827 | is used for customizing self-insertion. The character to | ||
| 3828 | be inserted is translated through it. | ||
| 3829 | |||
| 3830 | *** Text clones. | ||
| 3831 | |||
| 3832 | The new function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text | ||
| 3833 | that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one | ||
| 3834 | clone to the other. | ||
| 3835 | |||
| 3836 | *** The function `insert-string' is now obsolete. | ||
| 3837 | |||
| 3838 | ** Filling changes. | ||
| 3839 | |||
| 3840 | *** In determining an adaptive fill prefix, Emacs now tries the function in | ||
| 3841 | `adaptive-fill-function' _before_ matching the buffer line against | ||
| 3842 | `adaptive-fill-regexp' rather than _after_ it. | ||
| 3843 | |||
| 3844 | ** Atomic change groups. | ||
| 3845 | |||
| 3846 | To perform some changes in the current buffer "atomically" so that | ||
| 3847 | they either all succeed or are all undone, use `atomic-change-group' | ||
| 3848 | around the code that makes changes. For instance: | ||
| 3849 | |||
| 3850 | (atomic-change-group | ||
| 3851 | (insert foo) | ||
| 3852 | (delete-region x y)) | ||
| 3853 | |||
| 3854 | If an error (or other nonlocal exit) occurs inside the body of | ||
| 3855 | `atomic-change-group', it unmakes all the changes in that buffer that | ||
| 3856 | were during the execution of the body. The change group has no effect | ||
| 3857 | on any other buffers--any such changes remain. | ||
| 3858 | |||
| 3859 | If you need something more sophisticated, you can directly call the | ||
| 3860 | lower-level functions that `atomic-change-group' uses. Here is how. | ||
| 3861 | |||
| 3862 | To set up a change group for one buffer, call `prepare-change-group'. | ||
| 3863 | Specify the buffer as argument; it defaults to the current buffer. | ||
| 3864 | This function returns a "handle" for the change group. You must save | ||
| 3865 | the handle to activate the change group and then finish it. | ||
| 3866 | |||
| 3867 | Before you change the buffer again, you must activate the change | ||
| 3868 | group. Pass the handle to `activate-change-group' afterward to | ||
| 3869 | do this. | ||
| 3870 | |||
| 3871 | After you make the changes, you must finish the change group. You can | ||
| 3872 | either accept the changes or cancel them all. Call | ||
| 3873 | `accept-change-group' to accept the changes in the group as final; | ||
| 3874 | call `cancel-change-group' to undo them all. | ||
| 3875 | |||
| 3876 | You should use `unwind-protect' to make sure the group is always | ||
| 3877 | finished. The call to `activate-change-group' should be inside the | ||
| 3878 | `unwind-protect', in case the user types C-g just after it runs. | ||
| 3879 | (This is one reason why `prepare-change-group' and | ||
| 3880 | `activate-change-group' are separate functions.) Once you finish the | ||
| 3881 | group, don't use the handle again--don't try to finish the same group | ||
| 3882 | twice. | ||
| 3883 | |||
| 3884 | To make a multibuffer change group, call `prepare-change-group' once | ||
| 3885 | for each buffer you want to cover, then use `nconc' to combine the | ||
| 3886 | returned values, like this: | ||
| 3887 | |||
| 3888 | (nconc (prepare-change-group buffer-1) | ||
| 3889 | (prepare-change-group buffer-2)) | ||
| 3890 | |||
| 3891 | You can then activate the multibuffer change group with a single call | ||
| 3892 | to `activate-change-group', and finish it with a single call to | ||
| 3893 | `accept-change-group' or `cancel-change-group'. | ||
| 3894 | |||
| 3895 | Nested use of several change groups for the same buffer works as you | ||
| 3896 | would expect. Non-nested use of change groups for the same buffer | ||
| 3897 | will lead to undesirable results, so don't let it happen; the first | ||
| 3898 | change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one | ||
| 3899 | finished. | ||
| 3900 | |||
| 3901 | ** Buffer-related changes: | ||
| 3902 | |||
| 3903 | *** The new function `buffer-local-value' returns the buffer-local | ||
| 3904 | binding of VARIABLE (a symbol) in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not | ||
| 3905 | have a buffer-local binding in buffer BUFFER, it returns the default | ||
| 3906 | value of VARIABLE instead. | ||
| 3907 | |||
| 3908 | *** `list-buffers-noselect' now takes an additional argument, BUFFER-LIST. | ||
| 3909 | |||
| 3910 | If it is non-nil, it specifies which buffers to list. | ||
| 3911 | |||
| 3912 | *** `kill-buffer-hook' is now a permanent local. | ||
| 3913 | |||
| 3914 | *** The function `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' now lets you maintain | ||
| 3915 | various status records in parallel. | ||
| 3916 | |||
| 3917 | It takes a variable (a symbol) as argument. If the variable is non-nil, | ||
| 3918 | then its value should be a vector installed previously by | ||
| 3919 | `frame-or-buffer-changed-p'. If the frame names, buffer names, buffer | ||
| 3920 | order, or their read-only or modified flags have changed, since the | ||
| 3921 | time the vector's contents were recorded by a previous call to | ||
| 3922 | `frame-or-buffer-changed-p', then the function returns t. Otherwise | ||
| 3923 | it returns nil. | ||
| 3924 | |||
| 3925 | On the first call to `frame-or-buffer-changed-p', the variable's | ||
| 3926 | value should be nil. `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' stores a suitable | ||
| 3927 | vector into the variable and returns t. | ||
| 3928 | |||
| 3929 | If the variable is itself nil, then `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' uses, | ||
| 3930 | for compatibility, an internal variable which exists only for this | ||
| 3931 | purpose. | ||
| 3932 | |||
| 3933 | *** The function `read-buffer' follows the convention for reading from | ||
| 3934 | the minibuffer with a default value: if DEF is non-nil, the minibuffer | ||
| 3935 | prompt provided in PROMPT is edited to show the default value provided | ||
| 3936 | in DEF before the terminal colon and space. | ||
| 3937 | |||
| 3938 | ** Searching and matching changes: | ||
| 3939 | |||
| 3940 | *** New function `looking-back' checks whether a regular expression matches | ||
| 3941 | the text before point. Specifying the LIMIT argument bounds how far | ||
| 3942 | back the match can start; this is a way to keep it from taking too long. | ||
| 3943 | |||
| 3944 | *** The new variable `search-spaces-regexp' controls how to search | ||
| 3945 | for spaces in a regular expression. If it is non-nil, it should be a | ||
| 3946 | regular expression, and any series of spaces stands for that regular | ||
| 3947 | expression. If it is nil, spaces stand for themselves. | ||
| 3948 | |||
| 3949 | Spaces inside of constructs such as `[..]' and inside loops such as | ||
| 3950 | `*', `+', and `?' are never replaced with `search-spaces-regexp'. | ||
| 3951 | |||
| 3952 | *** New regular expression operators, `\_<' and `\_>'. | ||
| 3953 | |||
| 3954 | These match the beginning and end of a symbol. A symbol is a | ||
| 3955 | non-empty sequence of either word or symbol constituent characters, as | ||
| 3956 | specified by the syntax table. | ||
| 3957 | |||
| 3958 | *** `skip-chars-forward' and `skip-chars-backward' now handle | ||
| 3959 | character classes such as `[:alpha:]', along with individual | ||
| 3960 | characters and ranges. | ||
| 3961 | |||
| 3962 | *** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits | ||
| 3963 | properties from surrounding text. | ||
| 3964 | |||
| 3965 | *** The list returned by `(match-data t)' now has the buffer as a final | ||
| 3966 | element, if the last match was on a buffer. `set-match-data' | ||
| 3967 | accepts such a list for restoring the match state. | ||
| 3968 | |||
| 3969 | *** Functions `match-data' and `set-match-data' now have an optional | ||
| 3970 | argument `reseat'. When non-nil, all markers in the match data list | ||
| 3971 | passed to these functions will be reseated to point to nowhere. | ||
| 3972 | |||
| 3973 | *** rx.el has new corresponding `symbol-start' and `symbol-end' elements. | ||
| 3974 | |||
| 3975 | *** The default value of `sentence-end' is now defined using the new | ||
| 3976 | variable `sentence-end-without-space', which contains such characters | ||
| 3977 | that end a sentence without following spaces. | ||
| 3978 | |||
| 3979 | The function `sentence-end' should be used to obtain the value of the | ||
| 3980 | variable `sentence-end'. If the variable `sentence-end' is nil, then | ||
| 3981 | this function returns the regexp constructed from the variables | ||
| 3982 | `sentence-end-without-period', `sentence-end-double-space' and | ||
| 3983 | `sentence-end-without-space'. | ||
| 3984 | |||
| 3985 | ** Undo changes: | ||
| 3986 | |||
| 3987 | *** `buffer-undo-list' allows programmable elements. | ||
| 3988 | |||
| 3989 | These elements have the form (apply FUNNAME . ARGS), where FUNNAME is | ||
| 3990 | a symbol other than t or nil. That stands for a high-level change | ||
| 3991 | that should be undone by evaluating (apply FUNNAME ARGS). | ||
| 3992 | |||
| 3993 | These entries can also have the form (apply DELTA BEG END FUNNAME . ARGS) | ||
| 3994 | which indicates that the change which took place was limited to the | ||
| 3995 | range BEG...END and increased the buffer size by DELTA. | ||
| 3996 | |||
| 3997 | *** If the buffer's undo list for the current command gets longer than | ||
| 3998 | `undo-outer-limit', garbage collection empties it. This is to prevent | ||
| 3999 | it from using up the available memory and choking Emacs. | ||
| 4000 | |||
| 4001 | ** Killing and yanking changes: | ||
| 4002 | |||
| 4003 | *** New `yank-handler' text property can be used to control how | ||
| 4004 | previously killed text on the kill ring is reinserted. | ||
| 4005 | |||
| 4006 | The value of the `yank-handler' property must be a list with one to four | ||
| 4007 | elements with the following format: | ||
| 4008 | (FUNCTION PARAM NOEXCLUDE UNDO). | ||
| 4009 | |||
| 4010 | The `insert-for-yank' function looks for a yank-handler property on | ||
| 4011 | the first character on its string argument (typically the first | ||
| 4012 | element on the kill-ring). If a `yank-handler' property is found, | ||
| 4013 | the normal behavior of `insert-for-yank' is modified in various ways: | ||
| 4014 | |||
| 4015 | When FUNCTION is present and non-nil, it is called instead of `insert' | ||
| 4016 | to insert the string. FUNCTION takes one argument--the object to insert. | ||
| 4017 | If PARAM is present and non-nil, it replaces STRING as the object | ||
| 4018 | passed to FUNCTION (or `insert'); for example, if FUNCTION is | ||
| 4019 | `yank-rectangle', PARAM should be a list of strings to insert as a | ||
| 4020 | rectangle. | ||
| 4021 | If NOEXCLUDE is present and non-nil, the normal removal of the | ||
| 4022 | `yank-excluded-properties' is not performed; instead FUNCTION is | ||
| 4023 | responsible for removing those properties. This may be necessary | ||
| 4024 | if FUNCTION adjusts point before or after inserting the object. | ||
| 4025 | If UNDO is present and non-nil, it is a function that will be called | ||
| 4026 | by `yank-pop' to undo the insertion of the current object. It is | ||
| 4027 | called with two arguments, the start and end of the current region. | ||
| 4028 | FUNCTION can set `yank-undo-function' to override the UNDO value. | ||
| 4029 | |||
| 4030 | *** The functions `kill-new', `kill-append', and `kill-region' now have an | ||
| 4031 | optional argument to specify the `yank-handler' text property to put on | ||
| 4032 | the killed text. | ||
| 4033 | |||
| 4034 | *** The function `yank-pop' will now use a non-nil value of the variable | ||
| 4035 | `yank-undo-function' (instead of `delete-region') to undo the previous | ||
| 4036 | `yank' or `yank-pop' command (or a call to `insert-for-yank'). The function | ||
| 4037 | `insert-for-yank' automatically sets that variable according to the UNDO | ||
| 4038 | element of the string argument's `yank-handler' text property if present. | ||
| 4039 | |||
| 4040 | *** The function `insert-for-yank' now supports strings where the | ||
| 4041 | `yank-handler' property does not span the first character of the | ||
| 4042 | string. The old behavior is available if you call | ||
| 4043 | `insert-for-yank-1' instead. | ||
| 4044 | |||
| 4045 | ** Syntax table changes: | ||
| 4046 | |||
| 4047 | *** The new function `syntax-ppss' provides an efficient way to find the | ||
| 4048 | current syntactic context at point. | ||
| 4049 | |||
| 4050 | *** The new function `syntax-after' returns the syntax code | ||
| 4051 | of the character after a specified buffer position, taking account | ||
| 4052 | of text properties as well as the character code. | ||
| 4053 | |||
| 4054 | *** `syntax-class' extracts the class of a syntax code (as returned | ||
| 4055 | by `syntax-after'). | ||
| 4056 | |||
| 4057 | *** The macro `with-syntax-table' no longer copies the syntax table. | ||
| 4058 | |||
| 4059 | ** File operation changes: | ||
| 4060 | |||
| 4061 | *** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when | ||
| 4062 | searching for an executable or an Emacs Lisp file. | ||
| 4063 | |||
| 4064 | *** New function `locate-file' searches for a file in a list of directories. | ||
| 4065 | `locate-file' accepts a name of a file to search (a string), and two | ||
| 4066 | lists: a list of directories to search in and a list of suffixes to | ||
| 4067 | try; typical usage might use `exec-path' and `load-path' for the list | ||
| 4068 | of directories, and `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' for the list | ||
| 4069 | of suffixes. The function also accepts a predicate argument to | ||
| 4070 | further filter candidate files. | ||
| 4071 | |||
| 4072 | One advantage of using this function is that the list of suffixes in | ||
| 4073 | `exec-suffixes' is OS-dependant, so this function will find | ||
| 4074 | executables without polluting Lisp code with OS dependencies. | ||
| 4075 | |||
| 4076 | *** The new function `file-remote-p' tests a file name and returns | ||
| 4077 | non-nil if it specifies a remote file (one that Emacs accesses using | ||
| 4078 | its own special methods and not directly through the file system). | ||
| 4079 | The value in that case is an identifier for the remote file system. | ||
| 4080 | |||
| 4081 | *** The new hook `before-save-hook' is invoked by `basic-save-buffer' | ||
| 4082 | before saving buffers. This allows packages to perform various final | ||
| 4083 | tasks. For example, it can be used by the copyright package to make | ||
| 4084 | sure saved files have the current year in any copyright headers. | ||
| 4085 | |||
| 4086 | *** `file-chase-links' now takes an optional second argument LIMIT which | ||
| 4087 | specifies the maximum number of links to chase through. If after that | ||
| 4088 | many iterations the file name obtained is still a symbolic link, | ||
| 4089 | `file-chase-links' returns it anyway. | ||
| 4090 | |||
| 4091 | *** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now | ||
| 4092 | ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as | ||
| 4093 | `.emacs' are treated as extensionless. | ||
| 4094 | |||
| 4095 | *** If `buffer-save-without-query' is non-nil in some buffer, | ||
| 4096 | `save-some-buffers' will always save that buffer without asking (if | ||
| 4097 | it's modified). | ||
| 4098 | |||
| 4099 | *** `buffer-auto-save-file-format' is the new name for what was | ||
| 4100 | formerly called `auto-save-file-format'. It is now a permanent local. | ||
| 4101 | |||
| 4102 | *** `visited-file-modtime' and `calendar-time-from-absolute' now return | ||
| 4103 | a list of two integers, instead of a cons. | ||
| 4104 | |||
| 4105 | *** The precedence of file name handlers has been changed. | ||
| 4106 | |||
| 4107 | Instead of choosing the first handler that matches, | ||
| 4108 | `find-file-name-handler' now gives precedence to a file name handler | ||
| 4109 | that matches nearest the end of the file name. More precisely, the | ||
| 4110 | handler whose (match-beginning 0) is the largest is chosen. In case | ||
| 4111 | of ties, the old "first matched" rule applies. | ||
| 4112 | |||
| 4113 | *** A file name handler can declare which operations it handles. | ||
| 4114 | |||
| 4115 | You do this by putting an `operation' property on the handler name | ||
| 4116 | symbol. The property value should be a list of the operations that | ||
| 4117 | the handler really handles. It won't be called for any other | ||
| 4118 | operations. | ||
| 4119 | |||
| 4120 | This is useful for autoloaded handlers, to prevent them from being | ||
| 4121 | autoloaded when not really necessary. | ||
| 4122 | |||
| 4123 | *** The function `make-auto-save-file-name' is now handled by file | ||
| 4124 | name handlers. This will be exploited for remote files mainly. | ||
| 4125 | |||
| 4126 | *** The function `file-name-completion' accepts an optional argument | ||
| 4127 | PREDICATE, and rejects completion candidates that don't satisfy PREDICATE. | ||
| 4128 | |||
| 4129 | *** The new primitive `set-file-times' sets a file's access and | ||
| 4130 | modification times. Magic file name handlers can handle this | ||
| 4131 | operation. | ||
| 4132 | |||
| 4133 | ** Input changes: | ||
| 4134 | |||
| 4135 | *** Functions `y-or-n-p', `read-char', `read-key-sequence' and the like, that | ||
| 4136 | display a prompt but don't use the minibuffer, now display the prompt | ||
| 4137 | using the text properties (esp. the face) of the prompt string. | ||
| 4138 | |||
| 4139 | *** The functions `read-event', `read-char', and `read-char-exclusive' | ||
| 4140 | have a new optional argument SECONDS. If non-nil, this specifies a | ||
| 4141 | maximum time to wait for input, in seconds. If no input arrives after | ||
| 4142 | this time elapses, the functions stop waiting and return nil. | ||
| 4143 | |||
| 4144 | *** An interactive specification can now use the code letter `U' to get | ||
| 4145 | the up-event that was discarded in case the last key sequence read for a | ||
| 4146 | previous `k' or `K' argument was a down-event; otherwise nil is used. | ||
| 4147 | |||
| 4148 | *** The new interactive-specification `G' reads a file name | ||
| 4149 | much like `F', but if the input is a directory name (even defaulted), | ||
| 4150 | it returns just the directory name. | ||
| 4151 | |||
| 4152 | *** (while-no-input BODY...) runs BODY, but only so long as no input | ||
| 4153 | arrives. If the user types or clicks anything, BODY stops as if a | ||
| 4154 | quit had occurred. `while-no-input' returns the value of BODY, if BODY | ||
| 4155 | finishes. It returns nil if BODY was aborted by a quit, and t if | ||
| 4156 | BODY was aborted by arrival of input. | ||
| 4157 | |||
| 4158 | *** `recent-keys' now returns the last 300 keys. | ||
| 4159 | |||
| 4160 | ** Minibuffer changes: | ||
| 4161 | |||
| 4162 | *** The new function `minibufferp' returns non-nil if its optional | ||
| 4163 | buffer argument is a minibuffer. If the argument is omitted, it | ||
| 4164 | defaults to the current buffer. | ||
| 4165 | |||
| 4166 | *** New function `minibuffer-selected-window' returns the window which | ||
| 4167 | was selected when entering the minibuffer. | ||
| 4168 | |||
| 4169 | *** The `read-file-name' function now takes an additional argument which | ||
| 4170 | specifies a predicate which the file name read must satisfy. The | ||
| 4171 | new variable `read-file-name-predicate' contains the predicate argument | ||
| 4172 | while reading the file name from the minibuffer; the predicate in this | ||
| 4173 | variable is used by read-file-name-internal to filter the completion list. | ||
| 4174 | |||
| 4175 | *** The new variable `read-file-name-function' can be used by Lisp code | ||
| 4176 | to override the built-in `read-file-name' function. | ||
| 4177 | |||
| 4178 | *** The new variable `read-file-name-completion-ignore-case' specifies | ||
| 4179 | whether completion ignores case when reading a file name with the | ||
| 4180 | `read-file-name' function. | ||
| 4181 | |||
| 4182 | *** The new function `read-directory-name' is for reading a directory name. | ||
| 4183 | |||
| 4184 | It is like `read-file-name' except that the defaulting works better | ||
| 4185 | for directories, and completion inside it shows only directories. | ||
| 4186 | |||
| 4187 | *** The new variable `history-add-new-input' specifies whether to add new | ||
| 4188 | elements in history. If set to nil, minibuffer reading functions don't | ||
| 4189 | add new elements to the history list, so it is possible to do this | ||
| 4190 | afterwards by calling `add-to-history' explicitly. | ||
| 4191 | |||
| 4192 | ** Completion changes: | ||
| 4193 | |||
| 4194 | *** The new function `minibuffer-completion-contents' returns the contents | ||
| 4195 | of the minibuffer just before point. That is what completion commands | ||
| 4196 | operate on. | ||
| 4197 | |||
| 4198 | *** The functions `all-completions' and `try-completion' now accept lists | ||
| 4199 | of strings as well as hash-tables additionally to alists, obarrays | ||
| 4200 | and functions. Furthermore, the function `test-completion' is now | ||
| 4201 | exported to Lisp. The keys in alists and hash tables can be either | ||
| 4202 | strings or symbols, which are automatically converted with to strings. | ||
| 4203 | |||
| 4204 | *** The new macro `dynamic-completion-table' supports using functions | ||
| 4205 | as a dynamic completion table. | ||
| 4206 | |||
| 4207 | (dynamic-completion-table FUN) | ||
| 4208 | |||
| 4209 | FUN is called with one argument, the string for which completion is required, | ||
| 4210 | and it should return an alist containing all the intended possible | ||
| 4211 | completions. This alist can be a full list of possible completions so that FUN | ||
| 4212 | can ignore the value of its argument. If completion is performed in the | ||
| 4213 | minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer from which the minibuffer was | ||
| 4214 | entered. `dynamic-completion-table' then computes the completion. | ||
| 4215 | |||
| 4216 | *** The new macro `lazy-completion-table' initializes a variable | ||
| 4217 | as a lazy completion table. | ||
| 4218 | |||
| 4219 | (lazy-completion-table VAR FUN) | ||
| 4220 | |||
| 4221 | If the completion table VAR is used for the first time (e.g., by passing VAR | ||
| 4222 | as an argument to `try-completion'), the function FUN is called with no | ||
| 4223 | arguments. FUN must return the completion table that will be stored in VAR. | ||
| 4224 | If completion is requested in the minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer | ||
| 4225 | from which the minibuffer was entered. The return value of | ||
| 4226 | `lazy-completion-table' must be used to initialize the value of VAR. | ||
| 4227 | |||
| 4228 | ** Abbrev changes: | ||
| 4229 | |||
| 4230 | *** `define-abbrev' now accepts an optional argument SYSTEM-FLAG. | ||
| 4231 | |||
| 4232 | If non-nil, this marks the abbrev as a "system" abbrev, which means | ||
| 4233 | that it won't be stored in the user's abbrevs file if he saves the | ||
| 4234 | abbrevs. Major modes that predefine some abbrevs should always | ||
| 4235 | specify this flag. | ||
| 4236 | |||
| 4237 | *** The new function `copy-abbrev-table' copies an abbrev table. | ||
| 4238 | |||
| 4239 | It returns a new abbrev table that is a copy of a given abbrev table. | ||
| 4240 | |||
| 4241 | ** Enhancements to keymaps. | ||
| 4242 | |||
| 4243 | *** Cleaner way to enter key sequences. | ||
| 4244 | |||
| 4245 | You can enter a constant key sequence in a more natural format, the | ||
| 4246 | same one used for saving keyboard macros, using the macro `kbd'. For | ||
| 4247 | example, | ||
| 4248 | |||
| 4249 | (kbd "C-x C-f") => "\^x\^f" | ||
| 4250 | |||
| 4251 | Actually, this format has existed since Emacs 20.1. | ||
| 4252 | |||
| 4253 | *** Interactive commands can be remapped through keymaps. | ||
| 4254 | |||
| 4255 | This is an alternative to using `defadvice' or `substitute-key-definition' | ||
| 4256 | to modify the behavior of a key binding using the normal keymap | ||
| 4257 | binding and lookup functionality. | ||
| 4258 | |||
| 4259 | When a key sequence is bound to a command, and that command is | ||
| 4260 | remapped to another command, that command is run instead of the | ||
| 4261 | original command. | ||
| 4262 | |||
| 4263 | Example: | ||
| 4264 | Suppose that minor mode `my-mode' has defined the commands | ||
| 4265 | `my-kill-line' and `my-kill-word', and it wants C-k (and any other key | ||
| 4266 | bound to `kill-line') to run the command `my-kill-line' instead of | ||
| 4267 | `kill-line', and likewise it wants to run `my-kill-word' instead of | ||
| 4268 | `kill-word'. | ||
| 4269 | |||
| 4270 | Instead of rebinding C-k and the other keys in the minor mode map, | ||
| 4271 | command remapping allows you to directly map `kill-line' into | ||
| 4272 | `my-kill-line' and `kill-word' into `my-kill-word' using `define-key': | ||
| 4273 | |||
| 4274 | (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-line] 'my-kill-line) | ||
| 4275 | (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-word] 'my-kill-word) | ||
| 4276 | |||
| 4277 | When `my-mode' is enabled, its minor mode keymap is enabled too. So | ||
| 4278 | when the user types C-k, that runs the command `my-kill-line'. | ||
| 4279 | |||
| 4280 | Only one level of remapping is supported. In the above example, this | ||
| 4281 | means that if `my-kill-line' is remapped to `other-kill', then C-k still | ||
| 4282 | runs `my-kill-line'. | ||
| 4283 | |||
| 4284 | The following changes have been made to provide command remapping: | ||
| 4285 | |||
| 4286 | - Command remappings are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key | ||
| 4287 | `remap', i.e. `(define-key MAP [remap CMD] DEF)' remaps command CMD | ||
| 4288 | to definition DEF in keymap MAP. The definition is not limited to | ||
| 4289 | another command; it can be anything accepted for a normal binding. | ||
| 4290 | |||
| 4291 | - The new function `command-remapping' returns the binding for a | ||
| 4292 | remapped command in the current keymaps, or nil if not remapped. | ||
| 4293 | |||
| 4294 | - `key-binding' now remaps interactive commands unless the optional | ||
| 4295 | third argument NO-REMAP is non-nil. | ||
| 4296 | |||
| 4297 | - `where-is-internal' now returns nil for a remapped command (e.g. | ||
| 4298 | `kill-line', when `my-mode' is enabled), and the actual key binding for | ||
| 4299 | the command it is remapped to (e.g. C-k for my-kill-line). | ||
| 4300 | It also has a new optional fifth argument, NO-REMAP, which inhibits | ||
| 4301 | remapping if non-nil (e.g. it returns "C-k" for `kill-line', and | ||
| 4302 | "<kill-line>" for `my-kill-line'). | ||
| 4303 | |||
| 4304 | - The new variable `this-original-command' contains the original | ||
| 4305 | command before remapping. It is equal to `this-command' when the | ||
| 4306 | command was not remapped. | ||
| 4307 | |||
| 4308 | *** The definition of a key-binding passed to define-key can use XEmacs-style | ||
| 4309 | key-sequences, such as [(control a)]. | ||
| 4310 | |||
| 4311 | *** New keymaps for typing file names | ||
| 4312 | |||
| 4313 | Two new keymaps, `minibuffer-local-filename-completion-map' and | ||
| 4314 | `minibuffer-local-must-match-filename-map', apply whenever | ||
| 4315 | Emacs reads a file name in the minibuffer. These key maps override | ||
| 4316 | the usual binding of SPC to `minibuffer-complete-word' (so that file | ||
| 4317 | names with embedded spaces could be typed without the need to quote | ||
| 4318 | the spaces). | ||
| 4319 | |||
| 4320 | *** New function `current-active-maps' returns a list of currently | ||
| 4321 | active keymaps. | ||
| 4322 | |||
| 4323 | *** New function `describe-buffer-bindings' inserts the list of all | ||
| 4324 | defined keys and their definitions. | ||
| 4325 | |||
| 4326 | *** New function `keymap-prompt' returns the prompt string of a keymap. | ||
| 4327 | |||
| 4328 | *** If text has a `keymap' property, that keymap takes precedence | ||
| 4329 | over minor mode keymaps. | ||
| 4330 | |||
| 4331 | *** The `keymap' property now also works at the ends of overlays and | ||
| 4332 | text properties, according to their stickiness. This also means that it | ||
| 4333 | works with empty overlays. The same hold for the `local-map' property. | ||
| 4334 | |||
| 4335 | *** `key-binding' will now look up mouse-specific bindings. The | ||
| 4336 | keymaps consulted by `key-binding' will get adapted if the key | ||
| 4337 | sequence is started with a mouse event. Instead of letting the click | ||
| 4338 | position be determined from the key sequence itself, it is also | ||
| 4339 | possible to specify it with an optional argument explicitly. | ||
| 4340 | |||
| 4341 | *** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1. | ||
| 4342 | |||
| 4343 | *** (map-keymap FUNCTION KEYMAP) applies the function to each binding | ||
| 4344 | in the keymap. | ||
| 4345 | |||
| 4346 | *** New variable `emulation-mode-map-alists'. | ||
| 4347 | |||
| 4348 | Lisp packages using many minor mode keymaps can now maintain their own | ||
| 4349 | keymap alist separate from `minor-mode-map-alist' by adding their | ||
| 4350 | keymap alist to this list. | ||
| 4351 | |||
| 4352 | *** Dense keymaps now handle inheritance correctly. | ||
| 4353 | |||
| 4354 | Previously a dense keymap would hide all of the simple-char key | ||
| 4355 | bindings of the parent keymap. | ||
| 4356 | |||
| 4357 | ** Enhancements to process support | ||
| 4358 | |||
| 4359 | *** Adaptive read buffering of subprocess output. | ||
| 4360 | |||
| 4361 | On some systems, when Emacs reads the output from a subprocess, the | ||
| 4362 | output data is read in very small blocks, potentially resulting in | ||
| 4363 | very poor performance. This behavior can be remedied to some extent | ||
| 4364 | by setting the new variable `process-adaptive-read-buffering' to a | ||
| 4365 | non-nil value (the default), as it will automatically delay reading | ||
| 4366 | from such processes, allowing them to produce more output before | ||
| 4367 | Emacs tries to read it. | ||
| 4368 | |||
| 4369 | *** Processes now have an associated property list where programs can | ||
| 4370 | maintain process state and other per-process related information. | ||
| 4371 | |||
| 4372 | Use the new functions `process-get' and `process-put' to access, add, | ||
| 4373 | and modify elements on this property list. Use the new functions | ||
| 4374 | `process-plist' and `set-process-plist' to access and replace the | ||
| 4375 | entire property list of a process. | ||
| 4376 | |||
| 4377 | *** Function `list-processes' now has an optional argument; if non-nil, | ||
| 4378 | it lists only the processes whose query-on-exit flag is set. | ||
| 4379 | |||
| 4380 | *** New fns `set-process-query-on-exit-flag' and `process-query-on-exit-flag'. | ||
| 4381 | |||
| 4382 | These replace the old function `process-kill-without-query'. That | ||
| 4383 | function is still supported, but new code should use the new | ||
| 4384 | functions. | ||
| 4385 | |||
| 4386 | *** The new function `call-process-shell-command'. | ||
| 4387 | |||
| 4388 | This executes a shell command synchronously in a separate process. | ||
| 4389 | |||
| 4390 | *** The new function `process-file' is similar to `call-process', but | ||
| 4391 | obeys file handlers. The file handler is chosen based on | ||
| 4392 | `default-directory'. | ||
| 4393 | |||
| 4394 | *** Function `signal-process' now accepts a process object or process | ||
| 4395 | name in addition to a process id to identify the signaled process. | ||
| 4396 | |||
| 4397 | *** Function `accept-process-output' has a new optional fourth arg | ||
| 4398 | JUST-THIS-ONE. If non-nil, only output from the specified process | ||
| 4399 | is handled, suspending output from other processes. If value is an | ||
| 4400 | integer, also inhibit running timers. This feature is generally not | ||
| 4401 | recommended, but may be necessary for specific applications, such as | ||
| 4402 | speech synthesis. | ||
| 4403 | |||
| 4404 | *** A process filter function gets the output as multibyte string | ||
| 4405 | if the process specifies t for its filter's multibyteness. | ||
| 4406 | |||
| 4407 | That multibyteness is decided by the value of | ||
| 4408 | `default-enable-multibyte-characters' when the process is created, and | ||
| 4409 | you can change it later with `set-process-filter-multibyte'. | ||
| 4410 | |||
| 4411 | *** The new function `set-process-filter-multibyte' sets the | ||
| 4412 | multibyteness of the strings passed to the process's filter. | ||
| 4413 | |||
| 4414 | *** The new function `process-filter-multibyte-p' returns the | ||
| 4415 | multibyteness of the strings passed to the process's filter. | ||
| 4416 | |||
| 4417 | *** If a process's coding system is `raw-text' or `no-conversion' and its | ||
| 4418 | buffer is multibyte, the output of the process is at first converted | ||
| 4419 | to multibyte by `string-to-multibyte' then inserted in the buffer. | ||
| 4420 | Previously, it was converted to multibyte by `string-as-multibyte', | ||
| 4421 | which was not compatible with the behavior of file reading. | ||
| 4422 | |||
| 4423 | ** Enhanced networking support. | ||
| 4424 | |||
| 4425 | *** The new `make-network-process' function makes network connections. | ||
| 4426 | It allows opening of stream and datagram connections to a server, as well as | ||
| 4427 | create a stream or datagram server inside Emacs. | ||
| 4428 | |||
| 4429 | - A server is started using :server t arg. | ||
| 4430 | - Datagram connection is selected using :type 'datagram arg. | ||
| 4431 | - A server can open on a random port using :service t arg. | ||
| 4432 | - Local sockets are supported using :family 'local arg. | ||
| 4433 | - IPv6 is supported (when available). You may explicitly select IPv6 | ||
| 4434 | using :family 'ipv6 arg. | ||
| 4435 | - Non-blocking connect is supported using :nowait t arg. | ||
| 4436 | - The process' property list can be initialized using :plist PLIST arg; | ||
| 4437 | a copy of the server process' property list is automatically inherited | ||
| 4438 | by new client processes created to handle incoming connections. | ||
| 4439 | |||
| 4440 | To test for the availability of a given feature, use featurep like this: | ||
| 4441 | (featurep 'make-network-process '(:type datagram)) | ||
| 4442 | (featurep 'make-network-process '(:family ipv6)) | ||
| 4443 | |||
| 4444 | *** The old `open-network-stream' now uses `make-network-process'. | ||
| 4445 | |||
| 4446 | *** `process-contact' has an optional KEY argument. | ||
| 4447 | |||
| 4448 | Depending on this argument, you can get the complete list of network | ||
| 4449 | process properties or a specific property. Using :local or :remote as | ||
| 4450 | the KEY, you get the address of the local or remote end-point. | ||
| 4451 | |||
| 4452 | An Inet address is represented as a 5 element vector, where the first | ||
| 4453 | 4 elements contain the IP address and the fifth is the port number. | ||
| 4454 | |||
| 4455 | *** New functions `stop-process' and `continue-process'. | ||
| 4456 | |||
| 4457 | These functions stop and restart communication through a network | ||
| 4458 | connection. For a server process, no connections are accepted in the | ||
| 4459 | stopped state. For a client process, no input is received in the | ||
| 4460 | stopped state. | ||
| 4461 | |||
| 4462 | *** New function `format-network-address'. | ||
| 4463 | |||
| 4464 | This function reformats the Lisp representation of a network address | ||
| 4465 | to a printable string. For example, an IP address A.B.C.D and port | ||
| 4466 | number P is represented as a five element vector [A B C D P], and the | ||
| 4467 | printable string returned for this vector is "A.B.C.D:P". See the doc | ||
| 4468 | string for other formatting options. | ||
| 4469 | |||
| 4470 | *** New function `network-interface-list'. | ||
| 4471 | |||
| 4472 | This function returns a list of network interface names and their | ||
| 4473 | current network addresses. | ||
| 4474 | |||
| 4475 | *** New function `network-interface-info'. | ||
| 4476 | |||
| 4477 | This function returns the network address, hardware address, current | ||
| 4478 | status, and other information about a specific network interface. | ||
| 4479 | |||
| 4480 | *** New functions `process-datagram-address', `set-process-datagram-address'. | ||
| 4481 | |||
| 4482 | These functions are used with datagram-based network processes to get | ||
| 4483 | and set the current address of the remote partner. | ||
| 4484 | |||
| 4485 | *** Deleting a network process with `delete-process' calls the sentinel. | ||
| 4486 | |||
| 4487 | The status message passed to the sentinel for a deleted network | ||
| 4488 | process is "deleted". The message passed to the sentinel when the | ||
| 4489 | connection is closed by the remote peer has been changed to | ||
| 4490 | "connection broken by remote peer". | ||
| 4491 | |||
| 4492 | ** Using window objects: | ||
| 4493 | |||
| 4494 | *** You can now make a window as short as one line. | ||
| 4495 | |||
| 4496 | A window that is just one line tall does not display either a mode | ||
| 4497 | line or a header line, even if the variables `mode-line-format' and | ||
| 4498 | `header-line-format' call for them. A window that is two lines tall | ||
| 4499 | cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if the | ||
| 4500 | variables call for both, only the mode line actually appears. | ||
| 4501 | |||
| 4502 | *** The new function `window-inside-edges' returns the edges of the | ||
| 4503 | actual text portion of the window, not including the scroll bar or | ||
| 4504 | divider line, the fringes, the display margins, the header line and | ||
| 4505 | the mode line. | ||
| 4506 | |||
| 4507 | *** The new functions `window-pixel-edges' and `window-inside-pixel-edges' | ||
| 4508 | return window edges in units of pixels, rather than columns and lines. | ||
| 4509 | |||
| 4510 | *** New function `window-body-height'. | ||
| 4511 | |||
| 4512 | This is like `window-height' but does not count the mode line or the | ||
| 4513 | header line. | ||
| 4514 | |||
| 4515 | *** The new function `adjust-window-trailing-edge' moves the right | ||
| 4516 | or bottom edge of a window. It does not move other window edges. | ||
| 4517 | |||
| 4518 | *** The new macro `with-selected-window' temporarily switches the | ||
| 4519 | selected window without impacting the order of `buffer-list'. | ||
| 4520 | It saves and restores the current buffer, too. | ||
| 4521 | |||
| 4522 | *** `select-window' takes an optional second argument NORECORD. | ||
| 4523 | |||
| 4524 | This is like `switch-to-buffer'. | ||
| 4525 | |||
| 4526 | *** `save-selected-window' now saves and restores the selected window | ||
| 4527 | of every frame. This way, it restores everything that can be changed | ||
| 4528 | by calling `select-window'. It also saves and restores the current | ||
| 4529 | buffer. | ||
| 4530 | |||
| 4531 | *** `set-window-buffer' has an optional argument KEEP-MARGINS. | ||
| 4532 | |||
| 4533 | If non-nil, that says to preserve the window's current margin, fringe, | ||
| 4534 | and scroll-bar settings. | ||
| 4535 | |||
| 4536 | *** The new function `window-tree' returns a frame's window tree. | ||
| 4537 | |||
| 4538 | *** The functions `get-lru-window' and `get-largest-window' take an optional | ||
| 4539 | argument `dedicated'. If non-nil, those functions do not ignore | ||
| 4540 | dedicated windows. | ||
| 4541 | |||
| 4542 | ** Customizable fringe bitmaps | ||
| 4543 | |||
| 4544 | *** There are new display properties, `left-fringe' and `right-fringe', | ||
| 4545 | that can be used to show a specific bitmap in the left or right fringe | ||
| 4546 | bitmap of the display line. | ||
| 4547 | |||
| 4548 | Format is `display (left-fringe BITMAP [FACE])', where BITMAP is a | ||
| 4549 | symbol identifying a fringe bitmap, either built-in or defined with | ||
| 4550 | `define-fringe-bitmap', and FACE is an optional face name to be used | ||
| 4551 | for displaying the bitmap instead of the default `fringe' face. | ||
| 4552 | When specified, FACE is automatically merged with the `fringe' face. | ||
| 4553 | |||
| 4554 | *** New buffer-local variables `fringe-indicator-alist' and | ||
| 4555 | `fringe-cursor-alist' maps between logical (internal) fringe indicator | ||
| 4556 | and cursor symbols and the actual fringe bitmaps to be displayed. | ||
| 4557 | This decouples the logical meaning of the fringe indicators from the | ||
| 4558 | physical appearance, as well as allowing different fringe bitmaps to | ||
| 4559 | be used in different windows showing different buffers. | ||
| 4560 | |||
| 4561 | *** New function `define-fringe-bitmap' can now be used to create new | ||
| 4562 | fringe bitmaps, as well as change the built-in fringe bitmaps. | ||
| 4563 | |||
| 4564 | *** New function `destroy-fringe-bitmap' deletes a fringe bitmap | ||
| 4565 | or restores a built-in one to its default value. | ||
| 4566 | |||
| 4567 | *** New function `set-fringe-bitmap-face' specifies the face to be | ||
| 4568 | used for a specific fringe bitmap. The face is automatically merged | ||
| 4569 | with the `fringe' face, so normally, the face should only specify the | ||
| 4570 | foreground color of the bitmap. | ||
| 4571 | |||
| 4572 | *** New function `fringe-bitmaps-at-pos' returns the current fringe | ||
| 4573 | bitmaps in the display line at a given buffer position. | ||
| 4574 | |||
| 4575 | ** Other window fringe features: | ||
| 4576 | |||
| 4577 | *** Controlling the default left and right fringe widths. | ||
| 4578 | |||
| 4579 | The default left and right fringe widths for all windows of a frame | ||
| 4580 | can now be controlled by setting the `left-fringe' and `right-fringe' | ||
| 4581 | frame parameters to an integer value specifying the width in pixels. | ||
| 4582 | Setting the width to 0 effectively removes the corresponding fringe. | ||
| 4583 | |||
| 4584 | The actual default fringe widths for the frame may deviate from the | ||
| 4585 | specified widths, since the combined fringe widths must match an | ||
| 4586 | integral number of columns. The extra width is distributed evenly | ||
| 4587 | between the left and right fringe. To force a specific fringe width, | ||
| 4588 | specify the width as a negative integer (if both widths are negative, | ||
| 4589 | only the left fringe gets the specified width). | ||
| 4590 | |||
| 4591 | Setting the width to nil (the default), restores the default fringe | ||
| 4592 | width which is the minimum number of pixels necessary to display any | ||
| 4593 | of the currently defined fringe bitmaps. The width of the built-in | ||
| 4594 | fringe bitmaps is 8 pixels. | ||
| 4595 | |||
| 4596 | *** Per-window fringe and scrollbar settings | ||
| 4597 | |||
| 4598 | **** Windows can now have their own individual fringe widths and | ||
| 4599 | position settings. | ||
| 4600 | |||
| 4601 | To control the fringe widths of a window, either set the buffer-local | ||
| 4602 | variables `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', or call | ||
| 4603 | `set-window-fringes'. | ||
| 4604 | |||
| 4605 | To control the fringe position in a window, that is, whether fringes | ||
| 4606 | are positioned between the display margins and the window's text area, | ||
| 4607 | or at the edges of the window, either set the buffer-local variable | ||
| 4608 | `fringes-outside-margins' or call `set-window-fringes'. | ||
| 4609 | |||
| 4610 | The function `window-fringes' can be used to obtain the current | ||
| 4611 | settings. To make `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', and | ||
| 4612 | `fringes-outside-margins' take effect, you must set them before | ||
| 4613 | displaying the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force | ||
| 4614 | an update of the display margins. | ||
| 4615 | |||
| 4616 | **** Windows can now have their own individual scroll-bar settings | ||
| 4617 | controlling the width and position of scroll-bars. | ||
| 4618 | |||
| 4619 | To control the scroll-bar of a window, either set the buffer-local | ||
| 4620 | variables `scroll-bar-mode' and `scroll-bar-width', or call | ||
| 4621 | `set-window-scroll-bars'. The function `window-scroll-bars' can be | ||
| 4622 | used to obtain the current settings. To make `scroll-bar-mode' and | ||
| 4623 | `scroll-bar-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying | ||
| 4624 | the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update | ||
| 4625 | of the display margins. | ||
| 4626 | |||
| 4627 | ** Redisplay features: | ||
| 4628 | |||
| 4629 | *** `sit-for' can now be called with args (SECONDS &optional NODISP). | ||
| 4630 | |||
| 4631 | *** Iconifying or deiconifying a frame no longer makes sit-for return. | ||
| 4632 | |||
| 4633 | *** New function `redisplay' causes an immediate redisplay if no input is | ||
| 4634 | available, equivalent to (sit-for 0). The call (redisplay t) forces | ||
| 4635 | an immediate redisplay even if input is pending. | ||
| 4636 | |||
| 4637 | *** New function `force-window-update' can initiate a full redisplay of | ||
| 4638 | one or all windows. Normally, this is not needed as changes in window | ||
| 4639 | contents are detected automatically. However, certain implicit | ||
| 4640 | changes to mode lines, header lines, or display properties may require | ||
| 4641 | forcing an explicit window update. | ||
| 4642 | |||
| 4643 | *** (char-displayable-p CHAR) returns non-nil if Emacs ought to be able | ||
| 4644 | to display CHAR. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has | ||
| 4645 | a font to display the character set that CHAR belongs to. | ||
| 4646 | |||
| 4647 | Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset | ||
| 4648 | does that, this value cannot be accurate. | ||
| 4649 | |||
| 4650 | *** You can define multiple overlay arrows via the new | ||
| 4651 | variable `overlay-arrow-variable-list'. | ||
| 4652 | |||
| 4653 | It contains a list of variables which contain overlay arrow position | ||
| 4654 | markers, including the original `overlay-arrow-position' variable. | ||
| 4655 | |||
| 4656 | Each variable on this list can have individual `overlay-arrow-string' | ||
| 4657 | and `overlay-arrow-bitmap' properties that specify an overlay arrow | ||
| 4658 | string (for non-window terminals) or fringe bitmap (for window | ||
| 4659 | systems) to display at the corresponding overlay arrow position. | ||
| 4660 | If either property is not set, the default `overlay-arrow-string' or | ||
| 4661 | 'overlay-arrow-fringe-bitmap' will be used. | ||
| 4662 | |||
| 4663 | *** New `line-height' and `line-spacing' properties for newline characters | ||
| 4664 | |||
| 4665 | A newline can now have `line-height' and `line-spacing' text or overlay | ||
| 4666 | properties that control the height of the corresponding display row. | ||
| 4667 | |||
| 4668 | If the `line-height' property value is t, the newline does not | ||
| 4669 | contribute to the height of the display row; instead the height of the | ||
| 4670 | newline glyph is reduced. Also, a `line-spacing' property on this | ||
| 4671 | newline is ignored. This can be used to tile small images or image | ||
| 4672 | slices without adding blank areas between the images. | ||
| 4673 | |||
| 4674 | If the `line-height' property value is a positive integer, the value | ||
| 4675 | specifies the minimum line height in pixels. If necessary, the line | ||
| 4676 | height it increased by increasing the line's ascent. | ||
| 4677 | |||
| 4678 | If the `line-height' property value is a float, the minimum line | ||
| 4679 | height is calculated by multiplying the default frame line height by | ||
| 4680 | the given value. | ||
| 4681 | |||
| 4682 | If the `line-height' property value is a cons (FACE . RATIO), the | ||
| 4683 | minimum line height is calculated as RATIO * height of named FACE. | ||
| 4684 | RATIO is int or float. If FACE is t, it specifies the current face. | ||
| 4685 | |||
| 4686 | If the `line-height' property value is a cons (nil . RATIO), the line | ||
| 4687 | height is calculated as RATIO * actual height of the line's contents. | ||
| 4688 | |||
| 4689 | If the `line-height' value is a cons (HEIGHT . TOTAL), HEIGHT specifies | ||
| 4690 | the line height as described above, while TOTAL is any of the forms | ||
| 4691 | described above and specifies the total height of the line, causing a | ||
| 4692 | varying number of pixels to be inserted after the line to make it line | ||
| 4693 | exactly that many pixels high. | ||
| 4694 | |||
| 4695 | If the `line-spacing' property value is an positive integer, the value | ||
| 4696 | is used as additional pixels to insert after the display line; this | ||
| 4697 | overrides the default frame `line-spacing' and any buffer local value of | ||
| 4698 | the `line-spacing' variable. | ||
| 4699 | |||
| 4700 | If the `line-spacing' property is a float or cons, the line spacing | ||
| 4701 | is calculated as specified above for the `line-height' property. | ||
| 4702 | |||
| 4703 | *** The buffer local `line-spacing' variable can now have a float value, | ||
| 4704 | which is used as a height relative to the default frame line height. | ||
| 4705 | |||
| 4706 | *** Enhancements to stretch display properties | ||
| 4707 | |||
| 4708 | The display property stretch specification form `(space PROPS)', where | ||
| 4709 | PROPS is a property list, now allows pixel based width and height | ||
| 4710 | specifications, as well as enhanced horizontal text alignment. | ||
| 4711 | |||
| 4712 | The value of these properties can now be a (primitive) expression | ||
| 4713 | which is evaluated during redisplay. The following expressions | ||
| 4714 | are supported: | ||
| 4715 | |||
| 4716 | EXPR ::= NUM | (NUM) | UNIT | ELEM | POS | IMAGE | FORM | ||
| 4717 | NUM ::= INTEGER | FLOAT | SYMBOL | ||
| 4718 | UNIT ::= in | mm | cm | width | height | ||
| 4719 | ELEM ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin | ||
| 4720 | | scroll-bar | text | ||
| 4721 | POS ::= left | center | right | ||
| 4722 | FORM ::= (NUM . EXPR) | (OP EXPR ...) | ||
| 4723 | OP ::= + | - | ||
| 4724 | |||
| 4725 | The form `NUM' specifies a fractional width or height of the default | ||
| 4726 | frame font size. The form `(NUM)' specifies an absolute number of | ||
| 4727 | pixels. If a symbol is specified, its buffer-local variable binding | ||
| 4728 | is used. The `in', `mm', and `cm' units specifies the number of | ||
| 4729 | pixels per inch, milli-meter, and centi-meter, resp. The `width' and | ||
| 4730 | `height' units correspond to the width and height of the current face | ||
| 4731 | font. An image specification corresponds to the width or height of | ||
| 4732 | the image. | ||
| 4733 | |||
| 4734 | The `left-fringe', `right-fringe', `left-margin', `right-margin', | ||
| 4735 | `scroll-bar', and `text' elements specify to the width of the | ||
| 4736 | corresponding area of the window. | ||
| 4737 | |||
| 4738 | The `left', `center', and `right' positions can be used with :align-to | ||
| 4739 | to specify a position relative to the left edge, center, or right edge | ||
| 4740 | of the text area. One of the above window elements (except `text') | ||
| 4741 | can also be used with :align-to to specify that the position is | ||
| 4742 | relative to the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for | ||
| 4743 | a relative position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of | ||
| 4744 | these symbols), further occurrences of these symbols are interpreted as | ||
| 4745 | the width of the area. | ||
| 4746 | |||
| 4747 | For example, to align to the center of the left-margin, use | ||
| 4748 | :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin)) | ||
| 4749 | |||
| 4750 | If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative | ||
| 4751 | to the left edge of the text area. For example, :align-to 0 in a | ||
| 4752 | header line aligns with the first text column in the text area. | ||
| 4753 | |||
| 4754 | The value of the form `(NUM . EXPR)' is the value of NUM multiplied by | ||
| 4755 | the value of the expression EXPR. For example, (2 . in) specifies a | ||
| 4756 | width of 2 inches, while (0.5 . IMAGE) specifies half the width (or | ||
| 4757 | height) of the specified image. | ||
| 4758 | |||
| 4759 | The form `(+ EXPR ...)' adds up the value of the expressions. | ||
| 4760 | The form `(- EXPR ...)' negates or subtracts the value of the expressions. | ||
| 4761 | |||
| 4762 | *** Normally, the cursor is displayed at the end of any overlay and | ||
| 4763 | text property string that may be present at the current window | ||
| 4764 | position. The cursor can now be placed on any character of such | ||
| 4765 | strings by giving that character a non-nil `cursor' text property. | ||
| 4766 | |||
| 4767 | *** The display space :width and :align-to text properties are now | ||
| 4768 | supported on text terminals. | ||
| 4769 | |||
| 4770 | *** Support for displaying image slices | ||
| 4771 | |||
| 4772 | **** New display property (slice X Y WIDTH HEIGHT) can be used with | ||
| 4773 | an image property to display only a specific slice of the image. | ||
| 4774 | |||
| 4775 | **** Function `insert-image' has new optional fourth arg to | ||
| 4776 | specify image slice (X Y WIDTH HEIGHT). | ||
| 4777 | |||
| 4778 | **** New function `insert-sliced-image' inserts a given image as a | ||
| 4779 | specified number of evenly sized slices (rows x columns). | ||
| 4780 | |||
| 4781 | *** Images can now have an associated image map via the :map property. | ||
| 4782 | |||
| 4783 | An image map is an alist where each element has the format (AREA ID PLIST). | ||
| 4784 | An AREA is specified as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon: | ||
| 4785 | A rectangle is a cons (rect . ((X0 . Y0) . (X1 . Y1))) specifying the | ||
| 4786 | pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right corners. | ||
| 4787 | A circle is a cons (circle . ((X0 . Y0) . R)) specifying the center | ||
| 4788 | and the radius of the circle; R can be a float or integer. | ||
| 4789 | A polygon is a cons (poly . [X0 Y0 X1 Y1 ...]) where each pair in the | ||
| 4790 | vector describes one corner in the polygon. | ||
| 4791 | |||
| 4792 | When the mouse pointer is above a hot-spot area of an image, the | ||
| 4793 | PLIST of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a `help-echo' | ||
| 4794 | property it defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains | ||
| 4795 | a `pointer' property, it defines the shape of the mouse cursor when | ||
| 4796 | it is over the hot-spot. See the variable `void-area-text-pointer' | ||
| 4797 | for possible pointer shapes. | ||
| 4798 | |||
| 4799 | When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot, | ||
| 4800 | an event is composed by combining the ID of the hot-spot with the | ||
| 4801 | mouse event, e.g. [area4 mouse-1] if the hot-spot's ID is `area4'. | ||
| 4802 | |||
| 4803 | *** The function `find-image' now searches in etc/images/ and etc/. | ||
| 4804 | The new variable `image-load-path' is a list of locations in which to | ||
| 4805 | search for image files. The default is to search in etc/images, then | ||
| 4806 | in etc/, and finally in the directories specified by `load-path'. | ||
| 4807 | Subdirectories of etc/ and etc/images are not recursively searched; if | ||
| 4808 | you put an image file in a subdirectory, you have to specify it | ||
| 4809 | explicitly; for example, if an image is put in etc/images/foo/bar.xpm: | ||
| 4810 | |||
| 4811 | (defimage foo-image '((:type xpm :file "foo/bar.xpm"))) | ||
| 4812 | |||
| 4813 | Note that all images formerly located in the lisp directory have been | ||
| 4814 | moved to etc/images. | ||
| 4815 | |||
| 4816 | *** New function `image-load-path-for-library' returns a suitable | ||
| 4817 | search path for images relative to library. This function is useful in | ||
| 4818 | external packages to save users from having to update | ||
| 4819 | `image-load-path'. | ||
| 4820 | |||
| 4821 | *** The new variable `max-image-size' defines the maximum size of | ||
| 4822 | images that Emacs will load and display. | ||
| 4823 | |||
| 4824 | *** The new variable `display-mm-dimensions-alist' can be used to | ||
| 4825 | override incorrect graphical display dimensions returned by functions | ||
| 4826 | `display-mm-height' and `display-mm-width'. | ||
| 4827 | |||
| 4828 | ** Mouse pointer features: | ||
| 4829 | |||
| 4830 | *** The mouse pointer shape in void text areas (i.e. after the end of a | ||
| 4831 | line or below the last line in the buffer) of the text window is now | ||
| 4832 | controlled by the new variable `void-text-area-pointer'. The default | ||
| 4833 | is to use the `arrow' (non-text) pointer. Other choices are `text' | ||
| 4834 | (or nil), `hand', `vdrag', `hdrag', `modeline', and `hourglass'. | ||
| 4835 | |||
| 4836 | *** The mouse pointer shape over an image can now be controlled by the | ||
| 4837 | :pointer image property. | ||
| 4838 | |||
| 4839 | *** The mouse pointer shape over ordinary text or images can now be | ||
| 4840 | controlled/overridden via the `pointer' text property. | ||
| 4841 | |||
| 4842 | ** Mouse event enhancements: | ||
| 4843 | |||
| 4844 | *** All mouse events now include a buffer position regardless of where | ||
| 4845 | you clicked. For mouse clicks in window margins and fringes, this is | ||
| 4846 | a sensible buffer position corresponding to the surrounding text. | ||
| 4847 | |||
| 4848 | *** Mouse events for clicks on window fringes now specify `left-fringe' | ||
| 4849 | or `right-fringe' as the area. | ||
| 4850 | |||
| 4851 | *** Mouse events include actual glyph column and row for all event types | ||
| 4852 | and all areas. | ||
| 4853 | |||
| 4854 | *** Mouse events can now indicate an image object clicked on. | ||
| 4855 | |||
| 4856 | *** Mouse events include relative X and Y pixel coordinates relative to | ||
| 4857 | the top left corner of the object (image or character) clicked on. | ||
| 4858 | |||
| 4859 | *** Mouse events include the pixel width and height of the object | ||
| 4860 | (image or character) clicked on. | ||
| 4861 | |||
| 4862 | *** Function `mouse-set-point' now works for events outside text area. | ||
| 4863 | |||
| 4864 | *** `posn-point' now returns buffer position for non-text area events. | ||
| 4865 | |||
| 4866 | *** New function `posn-area' returns window area clicked on (nil means | ||
| 4867 | text area). | ||
| 4868 | |||
| 4869 | *** New function `posn-actual-col-row' returns the actual glyph coordinates | ||
| 4870 | of the mouse event position. | ||
| 4871 | |||
| 4872 | *** New functions 'posn-object', 'posn-object-x-y', 'posn-object-width-height'. | ||
| 4873 | |||
| 4874 | These return the image or string object of a mouse click, the X and Y | ||
| 4875 | pixel coordinates relative to the top left corner of that object, and | ||
| 4876 | the total width and height of that object. | ||
| 4877 | |||
| 4878 | ** Text property and overlay changes: | ||
| 4879 | |||
| 4880 | *** Arguments for `remove-overlays' are now optional, so that you can | ||
| 4881 | remove all overlays in the buffer with just (remove-overlays). | ||
| 4882 | |||
| 4883 | *** New variable `char-property-alias-alist'. | ||
| 4884 | |||
| 4885 | This variable allows you to create alternative names for text | ||
| 4886 | properties. It works at the same level as `default-text-properties', | ||
| 4887 | although it applies to overlays as well. This variable was introduced | ||
| 4888 | to implement the `font-lock-face' property. | ||
| 4889 | |||
| 4890 | *** New function `get-char-property-and-overlay' accepts the same | ||
| 4891 | arguments as `get-char-property' and returns a cons whose car is the | ||
| 4892 | return value of `get-char-property' called with those arguments and | ||
| 4893 | whose cdr is the overlay in which the property was found, or nil if | ||
| 4894 | it was found as a text property or not found at all. | ||
| 4895 | |||
| 4896 | *** The new function `remove-list-of-text-properties'. | ||
| 4897 | |||
| 4898 | It is like `remove-text-properties' except that it takes a list of | ||
| 4899 | property names as argument rather than a property list. | ||
| 4900 | |||
| 4901 | ** Face changes | ||
| 4902 | |||
| 4903 | *** The variable `facemenu-unlisted-faces' has been removed. | ||
| 4904 | Emacs has a lot more faces than in the past, and nearly all of them | ||
| 4905 | needed to be excluded. The new variable `facemenu-listed-faces' lists | ||
| 4906 | the faces to include in the face menu. | ||
| 4907 | |||
| 4908 | *** The new face attribute condition `min-colors' can be used to tailor | ||
| 4909 | the face color to the number of colors supported by a display, and | ||
| 4910 | define the foreground and background colors accordingly so that they | ||
| 4911 | look best on a terminal that supports at least this many colors. This | ||
| 4912 | is now the preferred method for defining default faces in a way that | ||
| 4913 | makes a good use of the capabilities of the display. | ||
| 4914 | |||
| 4915 | *** New function `display-supports-face-attributes-p' can be used to test | ||
| 4916 | whether a given set of face attributes is actually displayable. | ||
| 4917 | |||
| 4918 | A new predicate `supports' has also been added to the `defface' face | ||
| 4919 | specification language, which can be used to do this test for faces | ||
| 4920 | defined with `defface'. | ||
| 4921 | |||
| 4922 | *** The special treatment of faces whose names are of the form `fg:COLOR' | ||
| 4923 | or `bg:COLOR' has been removed. Lisp programs should use the | ||
| 4924 | `defface' facility for defining faces with specific colors, or use | ||
| 4925 | the feature of specifying the face attributes :foreground and :background | ||
| 4926 | directly in the `face' property instead of using a named face. | ||
| 4927 | |||
| 4928 | *** The first face specification element in a defface can specify | ||
| 4929 | `default' instead of frame classification. Then its attributes act as | ||
| 4930 | defaults that apply to all the subsequent cases (and can be overridden | ||
| 4931 | by them). | ||
| 4932 | |||
| 4933 | *** The function `face-differs-from-default-p' now truly checks | ||
| 4934 | whether the given face displays differently from the default face or | ||
| 4935 | not (previously it did only a very cursory check). | ||
| 4936 | |||
| 4937 | *** `face-attribute', `face-foreground', `face-background', `face-stipple'. | ||
| 4938 | |||
| 4939 | These now accept a new optional argument, INHERIT, which controls how | ||
| 4940 | face inheritance is used when determining the value of a face | ||
| 4941 | attribute. | ||
| 4942 | |||
| 4943 | *** New functions `face-attribute-relative-p' and `merge-face-attribute' | ||
| 4944 | help with handling relative face attributes. | ||
| 4945 | |||
| 4946 | *** The priority of faces in an :inherit attribute face list is reversed. | ||
| 4947 | |||
| 4948 | If a face contains an :inherit attribute with a list of faces, earlier | ||
| 4949 | faces in the list override later faces in the list; in previous | ||
| 4950 | releases of Emacs, the order was the opposite. This change was made | ||
| 4951 | so that :inherit face lists operate identically to face lists in text | ||
| 4952 | `face' properties. | ||
| 4953 | |||
| 4954 | *** The variable `face-font-rescale-alist' specifies how much larger | ||
| 4955 | (or smaller) font we should use. For instance, if the value is | ||
| 4956 | '((SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN . 1.3)) and a face requests a font of 10 | ||
| 4957 | point, we actually use a font of 13 point if the font matches | ||
| 4958 | SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN. | ||
| 4959 | |||
| 4960 | *** On terminals, faces with the :inverse-video attribute are displayed | ||
| 4961 | with swapped foreground and background colors even when one of them is | ||
| 4962 | not specified. In previous releases of Emacs, if either foreground | ||
| 4963 | or background color was unspecified, colors were not swapped. This | ||
| 4964 | was inconsistent with the face behavior under X. | ||
| 4965 | |||
| 4966 | *** `set-fontset-font', `fontset-info', `fontset-font' now operate on | ||
| 4967 | the default fontset if the argument NAME is nil.. | ||
| 4968 | |||
| 4969 | ** Font-Lock changes: | ||
| 4970 | |||
| 4971 | *** New special text property `font-lock-face'. | ||
| 4972 | |||
| 4973 | This property acts like the `face' property, but it is controlled by | ||
| 4974 | M-x font-lock-mode. It is not, strictly speaking, a builtin text | ||
| 4975 | property. Instead, it is implemented inside font-core.el, using the | ||
| 4976 | new variable `char-property-alias-alist'. | ||
| 4977 | |||
| 4978 | *** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'. | ||
| 4979 | |||
| 4980 | **** the FACENAME returned in `font-lock-keywords' can be a list of the | ||
| 4981 | form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP2 VAL2 ...) so you can set other | ||
| 4982 | properties than `face'. | ||
| 4983 | |||
| 4984 | **** `font-lock-extra-managed-props' can be set to make sure those | ||
| 4985 | extra properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock. | ||
| 4986 | |||
| 4987 | *** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'. | ||
| 4988 | |||
| 4989 | If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified | ||
| 4990 | (see `jit-lock-defer-contextually'), then all of that text will | ||
| 4991 | be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element | ||
| 4992 | depends on text several lines further down (and when `font-lock-multiline' | ||
| 4993 | is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl: | ||
| 4994 | |||
| 4995 | s{ | ||
| 4996 | foo | ||
| 4997 | }{ | ||
| 4998 | bar | ||
| 4999 | }e | ||
| 5000 | |||
| 5001 | Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of | ||
| 5002 | text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a `jit-lock-defer-multiline' | ||
| 5003 | property over the second half of the command to force (deferred) | ||
| 5004 | refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed. | ||
| 5005 | |||
| 5006 | *** `font-lock-extend-region-functions' makes it possible to alter the way | ||
| 5007 | the fontification region is chosen. This can be used to prevent rounding | ||
| 5008 | up to whole lines, or to extend the region to include all related lines | ||
| 5009 | of multiline constructs so that such constructs get properly recognized. | ||
| 5010 | |||
| 5011 | ** Major mode mechanism changes: | ||
| 5012 | |||
| 5013 | *** New variable `magic-mode-alist' determines major mode for a file by | ||
| 5014 | looking at the file contents. It takes precedence over `auto-mode-alist'. | ||
| 5015 | |||
| 5016 | *** New variable `magic-fallback-mode-alist' determines major mode for a file by | ||
| 5017 | looking at the file contents. It is handled after `auto-mode-alist', | ||
| 5018 | only if `auto-mode-alist' (and `magic-mode-alist') says nothing about the file. | ||
| 5019 | |||
| 5020 | *** XML or SGML major mode is selected when file starts with an `<?xml' | ||
| 5021 | or `<!DOCTYPE' declaration. | ||
| 5022 | |||
| 5023 | *** An interpreter magic line (if present) takes precedence over the | ||
| 5024 | file name when setting the major mode. | ||
| 5025 | |||
| 5026 | *** If new variable `auto-mode-case-fold' is set to a non-nil value, | ||
| 5027 | Emacs will perform a second case-insensitive search through | ||
| 5028 | `auto-mode-alist' if the first case-sensitive search fails. This | ||
| 5029 | means that a file FILE.TXT is opened in text-mode, and a file | ||
| 5030 | PROG.HTML is opened in html-mode. Note however, that independent of | ||
| 5031 | this setting, *.C files are usually recognized as C++ files. It also | ||
| 5032 | has no effect on systems with case-insensitive file names. | ||
| 5033 | |||
| 5034 | *** All major mode functions should now run the new normal hook | ||
| 5035 | `after-change-major-mode-hook', at their very end, after the mode | ||
| 5036 | hooks. `run-mode-hooks' does this automatically. | ||
| 5037 | |||
| 5038 | *** Major modes can define `eldoc-documentation-function' | ||
| 5039 | locally to provide Eldoc functionality by some method appropriate to | ||
| 5040 | the language. | ||
| 5041 | |||
| 5042 | *** Use the new function `run-mode-hooks' to run the major mode's mode hook. | ||
| 5043 | |||
| 5044 | *** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks' | ||
| 5045 | are used by `define-derived-mode' to make sure the mode hook for the | ||
| 5046 | parent mode is run at the end of the child mode. | ||
| 5047 | |||
| 5048 | *** `define-derived-mode' by default creates a new empty abbrev table. | ||
| 5049 | It does not copy abbrevs from the parent mode's abbrev table. | ||
| 5050 | |||
| 5051 | *** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect' | ||
| 5052 | property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use | ||
| 5053 | it in that buffer. | ||
| 5054 | |||
| 5055 | ** Minor mode changes: | ||
| 5056 | |||
| 5057 | *** `define-minor-mode' now accepts arbitrary additional keyword arguments | ||
| 5058 | and simply passes them to `defcustom', if applicable. | ||
| 5059 | |||
| 5060 | *** `define-globalized-minor-mode'. | ||
| 5061 | |||
| 5062 | This is a new name for what was formerly called | ||
| 5063 | `easy-mmode-define-global-mode'. The old name remains as an alias. | ||
| 5064 | |||
| 5065 | *** `minor-mode-list' now holds a list of minor mode commands. | ||
| 5066 | |||
| 5067 | ** Command loop changes: | ||
| 5068 | |||
| 5069 | *** The new function `called-interactively-p' does what many people | ||
| 5070 | have mistakenly believed `interactive-p' to do: it returns t if the | ||
| 5071 | calling function was called through `call-interactively'. | ||
| 5072 | |||
| 5073 | Only use this when you cannot solve the problem by adding a new | ||
| 5074 | INTERACTIVE argument to the command. | ||
| 5075 | |||
| 5076 | *** The function `commandp' takes an additional optional argument. | ||
| 5077 | |||
| 5078 | If it is non-nil, then `commandp' checks for a function that could be | ||
| 5079 | called with `call-interactively', and does not return t for keyboard | ||
| 5080 | macros. | ||
| 5081 | |||
| 5082 | *** When a command returns, the command loop moves point out from | ||
| 5083 | within invisible text, in the same way it moves out from within text | ||
| 5084 | covered by an image or composition property. | ||
| 5085 | |||
| 5086 | This makes it generally unnecessary to mark invisible text as intangible. | ||
| 5087 | This is particularly good because the intangible property often has | ||
| 5088 | unexpected side-effects since the property applies to everything | ||
| 5089 | (including `goto-char', ...) whereas this new code is only run after | ||
| 5090 | `post-command-hook' and thus does not care about intermediate states. | ||
| 5091 | |||
| 5092 | *** If a command sets `transient-mark-mode' to `only', that | ||
| 5093 | enables Transient Mark mode for the following command only. | ||
| 5094 | During that following command, the value of `transient-mark-mode' | ||
| 5095 | is `identity'. If it is still `identity' at the end of the command, | ||
| 5096 | the next return to the command loop changes to nil. | ||
| 5097 | |||
| 5098 | *** Both the variable and the function `disabled-command-hook' have | ||
| 5099 | been renamed to `disabled-command-function'. The variable | ||
| 5100 | `disabled-command-hook' has been kept as an obsolete alias. | ||
| 5101 | |||
| 5102 | *** `emacsserver' now runs `pre-command-hook' and `post-command-hook' | ||
| 5103 | when it receives a request from emacsclient. | ||
| 5104 | |||
| 5105 | *** `current-idle-time' reports how long Emacs has been idle. | ||
| 5106 | |||
| 5107 | ** Lisp file loading changes: | ||
| 5108 | |||
| 5109 | *** `load-history' can now have elements of the form (t . FUNNAME), | ||
| 5110 | which means FUNNAME was previously defined as an autoload (before the | ||
| 5111 | current file redefined it). | ||
| 5112 | |||
| 5113 | *** `load-history' now records (defun . FUNNAME) when a function is | ||
| 5114 | defined. For a variable, it records just the variable name. | ||
| 5115 | |||
| 5116 | *** The function `symbol-file' can now search specifically for function, | ||
| 5117 | variable or face definitions. | ||
| 5118 | |||
| 5119 | *** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument | ||
| 5120 | to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist' | ||
| 5121 | and runs any code associated with the provided feature. | ||
| 5122 | |||
| 5123 | *** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted. | ||
| 5124 | Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more | ||
| 5125 | than 3 levels of nesting. | ||
| 5126 | |||
| 5127 | ** Byte compiler changes: | ||
| 5128 | |||
| 5129 | *** The byte compiler now displays the actual line and character | ||
| 5130 | position of errors, where possible. Additionally, the form of its | ||
| 5131 | warning and error messages have been brought into line with GNU standards | ||
| 5132 | for these. As a result, you can use next-error and friends on the | ||
| 5133 | compilation output buffer. | ||
| 5134 | |||
| 5135 | *** The new macro `with-no-warnings' suppresses all compiler warnings | ||
| 5136 | inside its body. In terms of execution, it is equivalent to `progn'. | ||
| 5137 | |||
| 5138 | *** You can avoid warnings for possibly-undefined symbols with a | ||
| 5139 | simple convention that the compiler understands. (This is mostly | ||
| 5140 | useful in code meant to be portable to different Emacs versions.) | ||
| 5141 | Write forms like the following, or code that macroexpands into such | ||
| 5142 | forms: | ||
| 5143 | |||
| 5144 | (if (fboundp 'foo) <then> <else>) | ||
| 5145 | (if (boundp 'foo) <then> <else) | ||
| 5146 | |||
| 5147 | In the first case, using `foo' as a function inside the <then> form | ||
| 5148 | won't produce a warning if it's not defined as a function, and in the | ||
| 5149 | second case, using `foo' as a variable won't produce a warning if it's | ||
| 5150 | unbound. The test must be in exactly one of the above forms (after | ||
| 5151 | macro expansion), but such tests can be nested. Note that `when' and | ||
| 5152 | `unless' expand to `if', but `cond' doesn't. | ||
| 5153 | |||
| 5154 | *** `(featurep 'xemacs)' is treated by the compiler as nil. This | ||
| 5155 | helps to avoid noisy compiler warnings in code meant to run under both | ||
| 5156 | Emacs and XEmacs and can sometimes make the result significantly more | ||
| 5157 | efficient. Since byte code from recent versions of XEmacs won't | ||
| 5158 | generally run in Emacs and vice versa, this optimization doesn't lose | ||
| 5159 | you anything. | ||
| 5160 | |||
| 5161 | *** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in Lisp files is now obeyed. | ||
| 5162 | |||
| 5163 | *** When a Lisp file uses CL functions at run-time, compiling the file | ||
| 5164 | now issues warnings about these calls, unless the file performs | ||
| 5165 | (require 'cl) when loaded. | ||
| 5166 | |||
| 5167 | ** Frame operations: | ||
| 5168 | |||
| 5169 | *** New functions `frame-current-scroll-bars' and `window-current-scroll-bars'. | ||
| 5170 | |||
| 5171 | These functions return the current locations of the vertical and | ||
| 5172 | horizontal scroll bars in a frame or window. | ||
| 5173 | |||
| 5174 | *** The new function `modify-all-frames-parameters' modifies parameters | ||
| 5175 | for all (existing and future) frames. | ||
| 5176 | |||
| 5177 | *** The new frame parameter `tty-color-mode' specifies the mode to use | ||
| 5178 | for color support on character terminal frames. Its value can be a | ||
| 5179 | number of colors to support, or a symbol. See the Emacs Lisp | ||
| 5180 | Reference manual for more detailed documentation. | ||
| 5181 | |||
| 5182 | *** When using non-toolkit scroll bars with the default width, | ||
| 5183 | the `scroll-bar-width' frame parameter value is nil. | ||
| 5184 | |||
| 5185 | ** Mode line changes: | ||
| 5186 | |||
| 5187 | *** New function `format-mode-line'. | ||
| 5188 | |||
| 5189 | This returns the mode line or header line of the selected (or a | ||
| 5190 | specified) window as a string with or without text properties. | ||
| 5191 | |||
| 5192 | *** The new mode-line construct `(:propertize ELT PROPS...)' can be | ||
| 5193 | used to add text properties to mode-line elements. | ||
| 5194 | |||
| 5195 | *** The new `%i' and `%I' constructs for `mode-line-format' can be used | ||
| 5196 | to display the size of the accessible part of the buffer on the mode | ||
| 5197 | line. | ||
| 5198 | |||
| 5199 | *** Mouse-face on mode-line (and header-line) is now supported. | ||
| 5200 | |||
| 5201 | ** Menu manipulation changes: | ||
| 5202 | |||
| 5203 | *** To manipulate the File menu using easy-menu, you must specify the | ||
| 5204 | proper name "file". In previous Emacs versions, you had to specify | ||
| 5205 | "files", even though the menu item itself was changed to say "File" | ||
| 5206 | several versions ago. | ||
| 5207 | |||
| 5208 | *** The dummy function keys made by easy-menu are now always lower case. | ||
| 5209 | If you specify the menu item name "Ada", for instance, it uses `ada' | ||
| 5210 | as the "key" bound by that key binding. | ||
| 5211 | |||
| 5212 | This is relevant only if Lisp code looks for the bindings that were | ||
| 5213 | made with easy-menu. | ||
| 5214 | |||
| 5215 | *** `easy-menu-define' now allows you to use nil for the symbol name | ||
| 5216 | if you don't need to give the menu a name. If you install the menu | ||
| 5217 | into other keymaps right away (MAPS is non-nil), it usually doesn't | ||
| 5218 | need to have a name. | ||
| 5219 | |||
| 5220 | ** Mule changes: | ||
| 5221 | |||
| 5222 | *** Already true in Emacs 21.1, but not emphasized clearly enough: | ||
| 5223 | |||
| 5224 | Multibyte buffers can now faithfully record all 256 character codes | ||
| 5225 | from 0 to 255. As a result, most of the past reasons to use unibyte | ||
| 5226 | buffers no longer exist. We only know of three reasons to use them | ||
| 5227 | now: | ||
| 5228 | |||
| 5229 | 1. If you prefer to use unibyte text all of the time. | ||
| 5230 | |||
| 5231 | 2. For reading files into temporary buffers, when you want to avoid | ||
| 5232 | the time it takes to convert the format. | ||
| 5233 | |||
| 5234 | 3. For binary files where format conversion would be pointless and | ||
| 5235 | wasteful. | ||
| 5236 | |||
| 5237 | *** The new variable `auto-coding-functions' lets you specify functions | ||
| 5238 | to examine a file being visited and deduce the proper coding system | ||
| 5239 | for it. (If the coding system is detected incorrectly for a specific | ||
| 5240 | file, you can put a `coding:' tags to override it.) | ||
| 5241 | |||
| 5242 | *** The new variable `ascii-case-table' stores the case table for the | ||
| 5243 | ascii character set. Language environments (such as Turkish) may | ||
| 5244 | alter the case correspondences of ASCII characters. This variable | ||
| 5245 | saves the original ASCII case table before any such changes. | ||
| 5246 | |||
| 5247 | *** The new function `merge-coding-systems' fills in unspecified aspects | ||
| 5248 | of one coding system from another coding system. | ||
| 5249 | |||
| 5250 | *** New coding system property `mime-text-unsuitable' indicates that | ||
| 5251 | the coding system's `mime-charset' is not suitable for MIME text | ||
| 5252 | parts, e.g. utf-16. | ||
| 5253 | |||
| 5254 | *** New function `decode-coding-inserted-region' decodes a region as if | ||
| 5255 | it is read from a file without decoding. | ||
| 5256 | |||
| 5257 | *** New CCL functions `lookup-character' and `lookup-integer' access | ||
| 5258 | hash tables defined by the Lisp function `define-translation-hash-table'. | ||
| 5259 | |||
| 5260 | *** New function `quail-find-key' returns a list of keys to type in the | ||
| 5261 | current input method to input a character. | ||
| 5262 | |||
| 5263 | *** `set-buffer-file-coding-system' now takes an additional argument, | ||
| 5264 | NOMODIFY. If it is non-nil, it means don't mark the buffer modified. | ||
| 5265 | |||
| 5266 | ** Operating system access: | ||
| 5267 | |||
| 5268 | *** The new primitive `get-internal-run-time' returns the processor | ||
| 5269 | run time used by Emacs since start-up. | ||
| 5270 | |||
| 5271 | *** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the | ||
| 5272 | user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name' | ||
| 5273 | accepts a float as UID parameter. | ||
| 5274 | |||
| 5275 | *** New function `locale-info' accesses locale information. | ||
| 5276 | |||
| 5277 | *** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS. | ||
| 5278 | The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was | ||
| 5279 | formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system. | ||
| 5280 | |||
| 5281 | *** New function `redirect-debugging-output' can be used to redirect | ||
| 5282 | debugging output on the stderr file handle to a file. | ||
| 5283 | |||
| 5284 | ** GC changes: | ||
| 5285 | |||
| 5286 | *** New variable `gc-cons-percentage' automatically grows the GC cons threshold | ||
| 5287 | as the heap size increases. | ||
| 5288 | |||
| 5289 | *** New variables `gc-elapsed' and `gcs-done' provide extra information | ||
| 5290 | on garbage collection. | ||
| 5291 | |||
| 5292 | *** The normal hook `post-gc-hook' is run at the end of garbage collection. | ||
| 5293 | |||
| 5294 | The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care. | ||
| 5295 | |||
| 5296 | ** Miscellaneous: | ||
| 5297 | |||
| 5298 | *** A number of hooks have been renamed to better follow the conventions: | ||
| 5299 | |||
| 5300 | `find-file-hooks' to `find-file-hook', | ||
| 5301 | `find-file-not-found-hooks' to `find-file-not-found-functions', | ||
| 5302 | `write-file-hooks' to `write-file-functions', | ||
| 5303 | `write-contents-hooks' to `write-contents-functions', | ||
| 5304 | `x-lost-selection-hooks' to `x-lost-selection-functions', | ||
| 5305 | `x-sent-selection-hooks' to `x-sent-selection-functions', | ||
| 5306 | `delete-frame-hook' to `delete-frame-functions'. | ||
| 5307 | |||
| 5308 | In each case the old name remains as an alias for the moment. | ||
| 5309 | |||
| 5310 | *** Variable `local-write-file-hooks' is marked obsolete. | ||
| 5311 | |||
| 5312 | Use the LOCAL arg of `add-hook'. | ||
| 5313 | |||
| 5314 | *** New function `x-send-client-message' sends a client message when | ||
| 5315 | running under X. | ||
| 5316 | |||
| 5317 | * New Packages for Lisp Programming in Emacs 22.1 | ||
| 5318 | |||
| 5319 | ** The new library button.el implements simple and fast `clickable | ||
| 5320 | buttons' in Emacs buffers. Buttons are much lighter-weight than the | ||
| 5321 | `widgets' implemented by widget.el, and can be used by lisp code that | ||
| 5322 | doesn't require the full power of widgets. Emacs uses buttons for | ||
| 5323 | such things as help and apropos buffers. | ||
| 5324 | |||
| 5325 | ** The new library tree-widget.el provides a widget to display a set | ||
| 5326 | of hierarchical data as an outline. For example, the tree-widget is | ||
| 5327 | well suited to display a hierarchy of directories and files. | ||
| 5328 | |||
| 5329 | ** The new library bindat.el provides functions to unpack and pack | ||
| 5330 | binary data structures, such as network packets, to and from Lisp | ||
| 5331 | data structures. | ||
| 5332 | |||
| 5333 | ** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave | ||
| 5334 | buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer. | ||
| 5335 | |||
| 5336 | It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master | ||
| 5337 | and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi | ||
| 5338 | buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the | ||
| 5339 | commands. | ||
| 5340 | |||
| 5341 | This is how to use sql.el and master.el together: the variable | ||
| 5342 | sql-buffer contains the slave buffer. It is a local variable in the | ||
| 5343 | SQL buffer. | ||
| 5344 | |||
| 5345 | (add-hook 'sql-mode-hook | ||
| 5346 | (function (lambda () | ||
| 5347 | (master-mode t) | ||
| 5348 | (master-set-slave sql-buffer)))) | ||
| 5349 | (add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook | ||
| 5350 | (function (lambda () | ||
| 5351 | (master-set-slave sql-buffer)))) | ||
| 5352 | |||
| 5353 | ** The new library benchmark.el does timing measurements on Lisp code. | ||
| 5354 | |||
| 5355 | This includes measuring garbage collection time. | ||
| 5356 | |||
| 5357 | ** The new library testcover.el does test coverage checking. | ||
| 5358 | |||
| 5359 | This is so you can tell whether you've tested all paths in your Lisp | ||
| 5360 | code. It works with edebug. | ||
| 5361 | |||
| 5362 | The function `testcover-start' instruments all functions in a given | ||
| 5363 | file. Then test your code. The function `testcover-mark-all' adds | ||
| 5364 | overlay "splotches" to the Lisp file's buffer to show where coverage | ||
| 5365 | is lacking. The command `testcover-next-mark' (bind it to a key!) | ||
| 5366 | will move point forward to the next spot that has a splotch. | ||
| 5367 | |||
| 5368 | Normally, a red splotch indicates the form was never completely | ||
| 5369 | evaluated; a brown splotch means it always evaluated to the same | ||
| 5370 | value. The red splotches are skipped for forms that can't possibly | ||
| 5371 | complete their evaluation, such as `error'. The brown splotches are | ||
| 5372 | skipped for forms that are expected to always evaluate to the same | ||
| 5373 | value, such as (setq x 14). | ||
| 5374 | |||
| 5375 | For difficult cases, you can add do-nothing macros to your code to | ||
| 5376 | help out the test coverage tool. The macro `noreturn' suppresses a | ||
| 5377 | red splotch. It is an error if the argument to `noreturn' does | ||
| 5378 | return. The macro `1value' suppresses a brown splotch for its argument. | ||
| 5379 | This macro is a no-op except during test-coverage -- then it signals | ||
| 5380 | an error if the argument actually returns differing values. | ||
| 5381 | |||
| 5382 | |||
| 5383 | |||
| 5384 | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | ||
| 5385 | This file is part of GNU Emacs. | ||
| 5386 | |||
| 5387 | GNU Emacs is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | ||
| 5388 | it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | ||
| 5389 | the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) | ||
| 5390 | any later version. | ||
| 5391 | |||
| 5392 | GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | ||
| 5393 | but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | ||
| 5394 | MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | ||
| 5395 | GNU General Public License for more details. | ||
| 5396 | |||
| 5397 | You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | ||
| 5398 | along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the | ||
| 5399 | Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, | ||
| 5400 | Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. | ||
| 5401 | |||
| 5402 | |||
| 5403 | Local variables: | ||
| 5404 | mode: outline | ||
| 5405 | paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$" | ||
| 5406 | end: | ||
| 5407 | |||
| 5408 | arch-tag: 1aca9dfa-2ac4-4d14-bebf-0007cee12793 | ||